Parameters

Table

Recommended value

Default

Frequency Band MCC MNC NCC

Cell_Common Cell_Common Cell_Common Cell_Common

GSM900&DCS1800 470 02 0~7 None None 0

BCC

Cell_Common

0~7

0

GPRS Support

Cell_Common

support GPRS

not support GPRS

EDGE Support

Cell_Common

No

No

Cellband

Cell_Common

0

0

RAC

Cell_Common

As per plan

As per plan

FH MODE

Cell_Common

As per frequency plan

As per frequency plan

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km))

Cell_Common

63

62

Cell Extension Type

Cell_Common

Normal cell

Normal Cell

Cell Antenna Hopping

Cell_Common

None

None

UL DTX

Cell_Common

Shall Use

Shall Use

Call Reestablishment Forbidden

Cell_Common

Yes

Yes

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN

Cell_Common

1

1

Direct Retry

Cell_Common

Yes

Yes

SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed

Cell_Common

Yes

Yes

DL PC Allowed TRX Index

Cell_Common TRx

Yes Depend on invidual site

Yes 65535

TRX No.

TRx

Depend on invidual site

255

Cell Index

TRx

Depend on invidual site

None

Site Index

TRx

Depend on invidual site

65535

Active State

TRx

Activated

Activated

Receive Mode

TRx

Depends on BTS/site configuration

None

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km))

Basic_Parameter

63

62

DL DTX

Basic_Parameter

No (tunable based on performance)

Yes

Direct Retry

Basic_Parameter

Yes

Yes

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN

Basic_Parameter

1

8

Call Reestablishment Forbidden

Basic_Parameter

Yes

Yes

UL DTX

Basic_Parameter

Shall Use

Shall Use

Flex HSN Switch

CH_MGT

Close

Close

th1(H) Call_Control 12 16 .Flex MAIO Switch CH_MGT Close Close Allocation TRX Priority Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) Call_Control 3 15 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) Call_Control 2 4 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) Call_Control 3 4 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) Call_Control 26 63 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) Call_Control 18 26 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.

hyst1(H) Call_Control 2 4 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) Call_Control 3 4 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) Call_Control 26 63 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) Call_Control 18 24 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) Call_Control 12 14 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) Call_Control 3 15 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) Call_Control 3 3 .

hyst2(F) Call_Control 3 3 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) Call_Control 26 30 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) Call_Control 3 1 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) Call_Control 3 2 .hyst1(F) Call_Control 2 2 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) Call_Control 18 22 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) Call_Control 12 As per plan AMR UL Coding Rate adj.

hyst1(F) Call_Control 2 2 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) Call_Control 26 As per frequency plan AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) Call_Control 18 18 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) Call_Control 12 12 Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) Call_Control 24 52 MS MAX Retrans Call_Control 4 4 Times N200 of SDCCH Call_Control 23 23 .

Info. HO 30 30 ULQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60 DLQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60 ULQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 65 DLQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 65 .AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) Call_Control 24 52 AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) Call_Control 24 64 Directed Retry Load Access Threshold Call_Control 75 85 T3105(10ms) HO 7 7 Max Resend Times of Phy.

UL Qual. Threshold HO 50 60 MS Power Prediction after HO HO No No Inter-System Handover Enable HO No No PBGT HO Allowed HO Yes Yes MS Fast Moving HO Allowed HO No No Load HO Allowed HO Yes No SDCCH HO Allowed HO No No PT(s) Idle_Mode 0 0 TO Idle_Mode 0 0 . Threshold HO 50 60 DL Qual.

Cell_Bar_Qualify Idle_Mode 0 No PI Idle_Mode Yes Yes CRH Idle_Mode 6dB 6dB .

Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes) Idle_Mode 60(should same for same LAC) 20 BS-PA-MFRAMS Idle_Mode 4 Multiframe Period 2 Multiframe Period BS_AG_BLKS_RES Idle_Mode 1 2 NCC Permitted Idle_Mode 255 11111111 .

Cell_Bar_Access Idle_Mode 0 No ATT Idle_Mode Yes Yes T3122(s) Other_Properties 10 10 T3111(ms) Other_Properties 1000 1000 T3109(ms) Other_Properties 27000 27000 T8(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 T3121(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 T3107(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 T7(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 T3101(ms) Other_Properties 3000 3000 .

Band Threshold 3 (-dBm) Other_Properties 92 92 . Band Threshold 5 (-dBm) Other_Properties 85 85 Interf.Interf. Band Threshold 4 (-dBm) Other_Properties 87 87 Interf.

Power_Control 4 5 . Power_Control 5 5 Filter Length for UL Qual. Band Threshold 2 (-dBm) Other_Properties 98 98 Interf. Band Threshold 1 (-dBm) Other_Properties 105 105 Interf.Interf. Band Threshold 0 (-dBm) Other_Properties 110 110 Filter Length for DL Qual.

Filter Length for DL RX_LEV Power_Control 5 5 Filter Length for UL RX_LEV Power_Control 4 5 DL Qual. Lower Threshold Power_Control 4 3 DL Qual. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 1 DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Power_Control 20 25 DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Power_Control 30 35 .

Lower Threshold Power_Control 4 3 UL Qual. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 1 UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Power_Control 25 20 UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Power_Control 35 30 PC Interval Power_Control 3 3 Min Access Level Threshold Data_In_PCU 15 15 PRACH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1 PBCCH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1 .UL Qual.

GPRS Penalty Time Data_In_PCU 10sec 10sec GPRS Temporary Offset Data_In_PCU 10dB 10dB T3192 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms T3168 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms .

.

The EGPRS is the enhanced GPRS. The routing area ID is broadcast in the system message. Each routing area has an ID. The NCC and the BCC form the base station identification code (BSIC). TA equals 219. even if the TRX is configured with FH data. For details. The GPRS requires the support of the BTS. for example. it cannot be changed. and paging group are transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value This parameter specifies whether a cell is an extension cell and specifies how to implement the extended cell. This parameter specifies the base station color code. the frequency. the cell where the TRX serves does not perform FH. DCS1800: The cell This parameter specifies that the network service (NS) in the GPRS packet service state performs location management based on the routing area. For example. EDGE supports high-rate data transmission. If this parameter is set to Not FH. see GSM Rec. frame number. value 0 indic This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used. GSM900: The cell supports GSM900 frequency band. This parameter specifies whether to enable the general packet radio service (GPRS) in a cell.08. This parameter specifies the network color code. Compared with GSM. which is provided by the telecom operator. a packet control unit (PCU) must be configured on the BSS side. The BCC identifies the cells with the same BCCH frequency in the neighborhood. The BCC and the NCC form the BSIC. A double-timeslot extension cell regards the additional TDMA frame as access delay. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message. The enhanced data rates for GSM evolution (EDGE) consists of EGPRS and ECSD. If the MS is in an unfavorable position or t This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) function. Theoretically. Once the frequency band is selected. In addition. . system information. Each new cell can be allocated frequencies of only one frequency band. the MCC of China is 460. and a serving GPRS support node (SGSN) mus This parameter specifies whether to enable the EDGE function in a cell. FH can be used to average the interferen This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. that is. a delay of about 120 This parameter specifies whether a cell supports the antenna hopping function. In a GSM cell. 05. This parameter specifies the mobile network code (MNC). The NCC is used to identify networks from area to area.Description This parameter specifies the mobile country code (MCC). which improv This parameter specifies the frequency band of new cells. The NCC is unique nationwide.

BTS3012AE. The RF receive mode can be Not Support. Cell Index must be unique in one BSC.. BTS3006C. For such BTSs as the BTS3012II and BTS3002E. For details. Thus a call may drop. This parameter specifies the TRX number. Each BTS is numbered uniquely in a BSC. The following two points should be paid attention to: 1. Internal 2G cells: 0-2047 External 2G cells: 2048-5047 External 3G cells: 5048-8047 This parameter specifies the index number of a BTS. and BTS3002E do not support Main Diversity.This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. It is n This parameter specifies whether the SDCCH dynamic allocation is allowed. This parameter specifies the RF receive mode of the DTRU. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). This parameter specifies the TRX number in a cabinet.08. . the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value of this parameter. This parameter specifies the unique index number of each TRX in a BSC. The DBS3900 GSM and BTS3900 GSM support Four Diversity Receiver and Main Diversity. not-activated and activated. 2. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 8047. This parameter specifies the operating status of the BTS. the TRX numbers may be discontinuous. Four Diversity Receiver. one-to-one mapping between them is not mandatory. This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. BTS3012II. In this case. If the logical TRX is separated from the physical board. It is used to uniquely identify a cell. see GSM Rec. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. which must be unique in one BTS. In this case. the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resu This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. 05. a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message. The BTS3012. Dividing Receiver. If the logical TRX is not separated from the physical board. When the number of GSM subscribers in a cell increases rapidly. Independent Receiver. many subscribers may fail to access the network due to insufficient SDCCH resources. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. or Main Diversity. In directed retry. the TCHs (includi This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed.

In this case. This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. . 05. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). The number of call drops is not incremented if the call reestablishment is successful or if the subscriber hooks on. the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced. you must adjust the TRX configuration of the BTS and the network layout. For details.This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell. This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) function. If directed retry is preformed frequently in a local network. this parameter can be configured. Thus a call may drop. When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. It is not a primary method of clearing traffic congestion. This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. Thus. the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resume the call.08. This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. This parameter specifies whether the dynamic HSN is permitted to be used. this parameter is set to YES. 05. Only when the FlexMAIO is set to YES. see GSM Rec. For details. In directed retry. see GSM Rec.08.

5 dB. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. the CIR is 1 dB. the CIR is 0. If this parameter is set to YES.5 dB. If RQI equals 1. and so forth. and so forth. When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. If RQI equals 1. the CIR is 1 dB. If RQI equals 1. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the CIR is 1 dB. the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced partially. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. . Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the TRX priority factor is ineffective. In the case of aggressive frequency reuse. the recommended value is set to Yes. if RQI equals 2. In tight frequency resuse. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. and so forth. the CIR is 1 dB.This parameter specifies whether to enable Flex MAIO. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. if RQI equals 2. if RQI equals 2. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. If RQI equals 1. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. and so forth. the CIR is 0. the CIR is 1 dB. the TRX priority factor is effective. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high TRX priority preferentially. If RQI equals 1. and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. the CIR is 0. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report.5 dB. If RQI equals 1. If this parameter is set to NO. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. if RQI equals 2.5 dB. the CIR is 0. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. the CIR is 0. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.5 dB. if RQI equals 2. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. Usually. the adjacent-channel interference and co-channel interference among channels occur. the CIR is 0. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. if RQI equals 2. the CIR is 1 dB. and so forth.5 dB. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. This parameter specifies whether the TRX priority is considered during channel assignment.

there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. if RQI equals 2. the CIR is 0. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS.5 dB.5 dB. if RQI equals 2. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. If RQI equals 1. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the CIR is 1 dB. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. If RQI equals 1. the CIR is 1 dB. If RQI equals 1. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. and so forth. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. If RQI equals 1. the CIR is 0. and so forth. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. the CIR is 1 dB. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. the CIR is 1 dB. . if RQI equals 2. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the CIR is 1 dB. the CIR is 1 dB.5 dB. if RQI equals 2. and so forth. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. if RQI equals 2. and so forth. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the CIR is 1 dB. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report.5 dB. the CIR is 0. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. and so forth. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.5 dB. If RQI equals 1. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. the CIR is 0.5 dB. If RQI equals 1. if RQI equals 2. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. if RQI equals 2. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call.Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. and so forth. and so forth. the CIR is 0. the CIR is 0. If RQI equals 1. the CIR is 0. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.5 dB. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS.

if RQI equals 2. and so forth. the CIR is 1 dB. if RQI equals 2. the CIR is 0. the CIR is 1 dB. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. . there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. and so forth. and so forth.5 dB. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. if RQI equals 2. the CIR is 0. the CIR is 1 dB. and so forth. if RQI equals 2.5 dB. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. If RQI equals 1. and so forth. the CIR is 0. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. if RQI equals 2. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. and so forth. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. if RQI equals 2. If RQI equals 1. the CIR is 0. and so forth.5 dB. the CIR is 1 dB. the CIR is 0. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. the CIR is 1 dB. If RQI equals 1. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the CIR is 0. the CIR is 0. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the CIR is 1 dB. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. If RQI equals 1. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS.5 dB.Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm.5 dB. the CIR is 1 dB. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. if RQI equals 2. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. If RQI equals 1. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm.5 dB.5 dB.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the CIR is 0.Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. If RQI equals 1. the counter S decreases by 1. and so forth.If the MS does not receive Immediate Assignment messages or Immediate Assignment Extend messages. If RQI equals 1. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. if RQI equals 2.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SDCCH. if RQI equals 2. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. it always listens to the messages on the BCCH and all the common control channels (CCCHs) in the CCCH group to which the MS belongs. This parameter specifies when an MS disconnects a call if the MS unsuccessfully decodes the SACCH message. and so forth. if RQI equals 2. the CIR is 1 dB. and so forth. if RQI equals 2. the CIR is 1 dB. If the MS detects errors in an I frame. 0408 and 05. the CIR is 0. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. For details of this parameter. Each time an SACCH message is correctly decoded. when the voice or data quality is degraded to an unacceptable situation and it cannot be improved through power control or channel handover. the CIR is 0. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. Once a dedicated channel is assigned to the MS. If RQI equals 1. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. see GSM Rec. the CIR is 0. Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.5 dB. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. If RQI equals 1. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. the CIR is 1 dB.When the counter S is equal to 0. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the MS re-sends Channel Request messages at a specified interval. After the MS initiates the immediate assignment procedure. the counter S is enabled and the initial value is set to this parameter value. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS.5 dB. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. the BTS should resend the I frame.08. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS.5 dB.5 dB.Therefore. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. . Each time an SACCH message is not decoded. the connection is to be re-established or released. the downlink radio link is considered as failed. the counter S increases by 2. This parameter specifies the maximum number of Channel Request messages that can be sent by an MS in an immediate assignment procedure. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. the CIR is 1 dB. and so forth. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.

. see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)). The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter. This parameter is used to adjust candidate target cells for directed retry. This parameter specifies the maximum number of Physical information retransmissions. Upon detecting the bursts. If the number of retransmissions exceeds Ny1 before the BTS receives any correct SAMB frame from the MS. 08.08. Meanwhile.58 and 04. For details. BTS resends physical information to MS and restarts the timer T3105. Usually. Assume that the maximum number is Ny1. For details. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under half-rate AMR calls. After receiving the message. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter. the Timer T3124 is set to 320 ms. For details. This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under full-rate AMR calls. The maximum times for resending physical information is Ny1. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. the BTS starts the timer T3105. the BTS sends the BSC a connection failure message. This parameter specifies the length of timer T3150. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter. the BTS resends the Physical information message to the MS. the BSC releases the newly assigned dedicated channel and stops the timer T3105. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter.08. the timer T3105 starts. If the timer T3105 expires before the BTS receives the SAMB frame from the MS.If the timer T3105 expires before BTS receives the SAMB frame from MS. The Physical information containing information about different physical layers guarantees correct MS access. When target cells are selected during direct retry. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. For details. 08. which can also be a handover failure message. the BTS sends a Physical information message to the MS over the main DCCH/FACCH and sends the MSG_ABIS_HO_DETECT message to the BSC. see GSM Rec. the MS constantly sends handover access bursts to the BTS. see GSM Rec. During asynchronous handover.58 and 04. When the BTS sends physical information to the MS. see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)). only the cells whose loads are smaller than or equal to the Directed Retry Load Access Threshold are selected as candidate target cells.

the ECSC parameter should also be set to Yes. the PBGT handover can be performed only on TCHs between the cells of the same layer and hierarchy. thus improving the network performance. For details. The purpose is to minimize system interference and improve signal quality. This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs. is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if intra-cell handovers are allowed. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special conditions. This parameter specifies whether an MS can use the optimum transmit power instead of the maximum transmit power to access the new channel after a handover. is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if intra-cell handovers are allowed. 0508 and 0408. Threshold. The load handover is used as an emergency measure instead of a primary measure to adjust abnormal traffic burst in partial areas. thus reducing the number of handovers. The load handover functions between the TCHs within one BSC or the TCHs in the cells of the same layer. an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. When an emergency handover is triggered. This parameter is valid only before the penalty time of cell reselection expires. . When an emergency handover is triggered. Based on the path loss. The cell must have less path loss and meet specific requirements.08 and 04. It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. This parameter specifies whether the inter-system handover and cell reselection are allowed The inter-system handover includes the handover from a 2G cell to the adjacent 3G cell and from a 3G cell to the adjacent 2G cell. When this parameter is set to Yes. see GSM Rec. An intra-cell handover. The load handover helps to reduce cell congestion. however. and balance the traffic load among cells. This parameter specifies whether a handover between signaling channels is enabled. This parameter specifies whether to enable the PBGT (POWER BUDGET) handover algorithm. To avoid ping-pong handovers. however. The Cell Reselect Penalty Time (PT for short) is used to ensure the safety and validity of cell reselection because it helps to avoid frequent cell reselection. An emergency handover due to bad quality is triggered when the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the UL Qual. This parameter specifies the downlink receive quality threshold of an emergency handover. This parameter applies only to GSM Phase II MSs. the MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell. An intra-cell handover. see GSM Rec. For details.This parameter specifies the uplink quality threshold of an emergency handover. Threshold. the cell and TRX configuration of BTSs and the network layout should be adjusted.08. If this parameter is set to Yes. This parameter specifies whether a traffic load-sharing handover is enabled. An emergency handover is triggered when the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to the DL Qual. an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. 05. If load handovers occur frequently in a partial area. This parameter specifies the temporary correction of C2. the BSC uses the PBGT handover algorithm to search for a desired cell in real time and decides whether a handover should be performed. The PBGT handover cannot be performed on SDCCHs. improve success rate of channel assignment. This parameter specifies whether an MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell.

TO. a least interval of 5s is required for C2-based cell reselection to avoid frequent cell reselection. This parameter can prevent frequent location update. this parameter determines the priority of cells. indicates whether CRO. the MS obtains the value of C2 based on the broadcast system information and determines whether a cell is reselected. This parameter is used to determine whether cell reselection is performed between different LACs. Actually. that is. 1: barred 0: allowed Together with CBA. C2 equals C1. see GSM Rec.In addition. For details. see the description of the cell reselection hysteresis.08. 04. 0408 and 0508. When PI is set to 1. see GSM Rec. the MS is informed whether C2-based cell reselection is performed. For details. When PI is set to 0. . Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect priority 0 0 Normal Normal 0 1 Barred Barred 1 0 Low Normal 1 1 Low Normal Cell Reselect Parameters Indication (PI for short). sent on the broadcast channel. It is invalid for cell reselection. the MS determines whether a cell is reselected based on the value of C1. For details.This parameter Cell Bar Qualify (CBQ) is valid only for cell selection. and PT are used. thus lowering the possibility of losing paging messages.

Abis interface. the number of paging sub-channels in a cell. In addition. Generally.02. If bit N is 0. and the system performance deteriorates as the value of this parameter increases. 05. see GSM Rec. . and the average standby time is greatly shortened. Each bit maps with an NCC (0-7) and the most significant bit corresponds to NCC 7. the capacity of the paging channel in a cell. When the location update period decreases. When the signaling traffic of the network increases. that is. This parameter specifies the number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH. In actual situation. the number of paging sub-channels in a cell increases. The load of the paging channels should be periodically measured on the running network. the MS power consumption increases. the value of the parameter should be as small as possible. After the CCCH is configured. For details about the calculation of the paging group. that is. the load on the A interface. must be the same as or similar to that in other cells of an LAC. In the VLR. 05. HLR.08. If the value of this parameter increases. this parameter actually indicates the CCCH usage for AGCH and PCH. Um interface. take into consideration the processing capability of the MSC and BSC. thus reducing the number of MSs served by each paging sub-channel and prolonging the average service time of the MS battery. This parameter should be set on the basis that the paging channel is not overloaded. and VLR. This parameter specifies the number of multi-frames in a cycle on the paging channel. For details. Thus. The value of this parameter has a byte (eight bits). But the delay of paging messages increases. This parameter affects the paging response time of an MS and the system performance. the MS reports the corresponding measurement report to the BTS. If a bit in the value of this parameter is set to 1. A paging message must be sent simultaneously in all the cells in an LAC. the service performance is improved. the usage of radio resources drops.This parameter specifies the length of the timer for periodic location update. when the location update period decreases. This parameter is an information element (IE) in the system information type 2 and 6 messages. This parameter specifies the NCCs to be reported by the MSs in a cell. a regular location update timer is defined. The value of this parameter should be adjusted on the basis of the load. an MS monitors only the associated paging sub-channel. see GSM Rec. rural areas.When setting this parameter. the MS does not measure the cell level of NCC N.02 and 05. a larger value is adopted in continuous coverage in urban areas and a smaller value in suburbs. or blind spots.In addition. the number of paging sub-channels on a specific paging channel.

their ATTs must be the same. The MS reports a Clear REQ message. . the BSS releases the seized SDCCH. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the timer T3109 stops. 04. if the timer T3109 expires. thus saving the network processing time and network resources. the BSC sends an outgoing BSC handover failure message. If the timer expires. If the BSC receives an EST IND message before T3101 expires. Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect priority 0 0 Normal Normal 0 1 Barred Barred 1 0 Low Normal 1 1 Low Normal This parameter specifies whether to enable the Attach-detach allowed (ATT) function. the BSC sends a handover failure message. T3101 is stopped. This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover complete message after a handover request acknowledgment message is sent by the BSC in 2G/3G handover or inter-BSC handover.08. the outgoing BSC handover fails. the BSC deactivates the channel. after the BSC sends a handover request message. Value 0 indicates that cell access is allowed. For different cells in the same LAC. the RF CHAN REL message is sent to the BTS after the timer expires. This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover success message after a handover command is sent in an outgoing BSC handover. For details. network connection is not provided after the MS is powered off. the timer T3107 is initiated. The BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and enables the timer T3109. Before the timer T7 expires. If this parameter is set to Yes. After the timer T7 expires. If the timer expires. After the timer T3107 expires. this parameter can be used to determine the priority of cells. see GSM Rec. The timer T311 is initiated when the BSC receives the REL_IND message from the BTS. the timer T7 is initiated. Together with CBQ. This parameter specifies the timer carried by the WaitIndcation information element when the BSC sends an immediate assignment reject message to an MS.This parameter specifies the cell bar access (CBA). Value 1 indicates that cell access is not allowed. This parameter specifies the connection release delay timer that is used to delay the channel deactivation after the main signaling link is disconnected. the MS makes another attempt to access the network after the timer expires. the timer T3107 stops if the BSC receives a handover complete message. The T3101 is started when the BSC sends an IMM ASS message to the BTS. if T3101 expires before the BSC receives an EST IND message. and the purpose is to reserve a period of time for repeated link disconnections. This parameter specifies the timer used in the immediate assignment procedure. In an outgoing BSC handover. the timer T7 stops if the BSC receives a handover acknowledgment message. After the BSC sends a handover command. After the MS receives the immediate assignment reject message. Before the timer T3107 expires.

The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great.08. the interference is not reflected. 08. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. For details. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover.21. then. see GSM Rec. 08. and 12.21. the interference is too obvious. 08.21. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small. the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. According to the strength of interference signals. 08. This helps the BSC to assign channels. . the interference is too obvious. the interference is not reflected.08.08. The values of these levels are called Interf. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. According to the strength of interference signals.This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. see GSM Rec. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The values of these levels are called Interf. For details. The BTS. Band Thresholds. then. and 12. sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. see GSM Rec. The values of these levels are called Interf.58. The BTS.58. This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. This helps the BSC to assign channels. then. the interference is not reflected. According to the strength of interference signals.58. sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. and 12. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great. Band Thresholds. 08. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. This helps the BSC to assign channels. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small. The BTS. For details. This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. the interference is too obvious. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. Band Thresholds. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small. 08. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds.

and 12. 08. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. This helps the BSC to assign channels. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs.58. 08. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. For details. . The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds.58.21. then.58. According to the strength of interference signals. reports a radio resource indication message to the BSC. the interference is too obvious. This helps the BSC to assign channels. The BTS. the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. the interference is not reflected. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. The values of these levels are called Interf.This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BTS. For details. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. The values of these levels are called Interf.21. sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. see GSM Rec. 08. the interference is too obvious. and 12. the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great. see GSM Rec. According to the strength of interference signals. Band Thresholds. then.21. 08. see GSM Rec. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small. The BTS. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. and 12. 08. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement.08. then. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment. According to the strength of interference signals. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. the interference is too obvious. the interference is not reflected. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great. 08. the interference is not reflected. This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement.08. The values of these levels are called Interf. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. Band Thresholds. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment. For details. This helps the BSC to assign channels. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis.08. Band Thresholds.

4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold.8% The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.4% to 12. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for power control.8% When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality.6% to 3.4% to 12.8% to 1.2% to 6.8% to 1. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. power control is performed.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold.4% to 0.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.2% to 6. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for power control. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal strength before the MS power adjustment. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 0.6% to 3. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12. . The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. power control is performed.4% to 0. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level.

The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 12. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0. Value 4 indicates four PBCCHs.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3. This parameter specifies the number of PRACH blocks. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0. Value 2 indicates two PBCCHs. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold.4% to 0. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the uplink quality for power control. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0. Value 3 indicates three PBCCHs.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.2% to 6.4% to 0..8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.6% to 3.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3. Value 1 indicates one PRACH. Value 2 indicates two PRACHs.8% to 1. . This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the uplink quality for power control..4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0. Value 1 indicates one PBCCH. This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous power control commands.8% The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. . When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.8% to 1. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set.When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 4. power control is performed. This parameter specifies the number of PBCCH blocks. power control is performed. Value 12 indicates 12 PRACHs.2% to 0. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level.2% to 0.8% When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6. This parameter specifies the minimum receive level that is required for a cell to serve as a candidate cell for handover.4% to 12.2% to 6.4% to 12. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.

T3168 is started to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment message from the network. If the MS does not receive the Packet Uplink Assignment message during the TBF release process. When the MS receives the last RLC data block carrying the last block flag (FBI=1) and confirms that all the RLC data blocks on the TBF are received. the MS initiates the PS access procedure again for four times. the MS responds immediately. T3168 is reset. the MS regards that this uplink TBF establishment has failed. After the MS sends the Packet Resource Request or Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying Channel Request Description. The timer is sent through the system message broadcast in each cell. This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment message. Therefore. If T3192 expires. This parameter is set to avoid the ping-pong cell reselection by the fast-moving MS. This parameter specifies the maximum interval set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment message. When the BCCH frequency of a cell is listed in the neighbor cells for the MS. it enters the dedicated mode. the MS enters the packet idle mode. If the Packet Uplink Assignment message is still not received. Otherwise. If the MS receives the Packet Uplink Assignment message before T3168 expires. Value infinity indicates an infinity offset. if the MS is in half-duplex mode and receives the Packet Uplink Assignment message.This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. During the TBF release process. If the MS is in dual transfer mode. the MS sends the Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying the final acknowledgement flag (FAI=1) and starts T3192 at the same time. . the MS releases the TBF resources and monitors paging channels. the negative offset of C2 is calculated before timer T expires. This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the TBF release after receiving the last data block. the MS does not select this cell when the duration of signal strength on the BCCH is shorter than the penalty time.

Configuration Policy

NSN PARAMETER

Name
BAND None None This parameter should be set as required. NCC 1. A training sequence is known by both the transmit end and the receive end. It is used to acknowledge the exact position of the other bits in the same burst and to determine whether the received co-channel signals are useful signals. If a burst is incon MCC MNC

Parameter Name
frequency band in use mobile country code mobile network code

BSIC NCC

BCC

bsIdentityCode

None GENA GPRSenabled

None EGENA egprsEnabled

None BAND frequency band in use

None RAC routing area code

None HOP The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the handover success rate may be affected. HoppingMode

DMAX

msMaxDistanceInCallSetup

None DMAX msMaxDistanceInCallSetup

None AHOP The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference DTX 2. On the downlink

dtxMode

The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed. If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop rate decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage, this parameter should be set to No. Call reestablishment If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter based

RE

callReestablishmentAllowed

RXP

rxLevAccessMin

None DR drInUse

None DYNAMIC_SDCCH None None PENA TRX_ID powerCtrlEnabled TRX ID

None

TRX_NUM

None CI None BTS_ID CellId BTS ID

If you activate a not-activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be activated. Conversely, if you deactivate an activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be deactivated. When the BTSs are cascaded, the lower-level BTS should be set to Not Activated if the Active State of the upper-level BTS is set to STATE Not Activated.

Administrative State

None

RDIV The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the handover success rate may be affected.

diversityUsed

DMAX

msMaxDistanceInCallSetup

the DTX function must be enabled on the MSC side. and reducing intermodulation inside the BTS 3. If this parameter is set to No. This function has the following benefits: 1. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage. Therefore. Call reestablishment lasts for a long time. you must set the parameter based on the balance conditions of the uplink and downlink levels. the inter-frequency interference is reduced and the network quality is improved. RXP The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed. If downlink DTX is disabled on the MSC side. and reducing intermodulation inside the BTS 3.The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. reducing system interference. RE The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference 2. the setting of this parameter determines whether downlink DTX is used in a cell. downlink DTX cannot be used irrespective of the setting of this parameter. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS. This function has the following benefits: 1. the average call drop rate decreases. thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. From the network perspective. It is recommended that this parameter be set to Yes. DOWNLINK DTX None DR If the value of this parameter is too small. DTX drInUse rxLevAccessMin callReestablishmentAllowed dtxMode None HSN1 hoppingSequenceNumber1 . The DL DTX function is also restricted by the MSC. If downlink DTX is enabled on the MSC side. this parameter should be set to No. From the network perspective. the required level of received signals is low. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference 2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS. reducing system interference.To enable this function. many MSs attempt to camp on the cell. the inter-frequency interference is reduced and the network quality is improved. In such a case. and therefore the subscriber cannot wait and hooks on.

None FLEXIBLE MAIO MANAGEMENT None TRP trxPriorityInTCHAlloc None amrConfigurationHr: hysteresis3 HRH3 None amrConfigurationHr: hysteresis2 HRH2 None amrConfigurationHr: hysteresis1 HRH1 None HRTD3 None HRTD2 None HRTD1 .

None HRH3 None HRH2 None HRH1 None HRTU3 None HRTU2 None HRTU1 None FRH3 .

None FRH2 None FRH1 None FRTD3 None FRTD2 None FRTD1 None FRH3 None FRH2 .

RLT This parameter should be set as required: In the areas where the traffic volume is low. and therefore resource usage is low. In the cells where congestion occurs or in the micro cells where the traffic volume is high. it is recommended this parameter be set to 1. radio links are likely to be faulty and therefore call drops occur.None FRH1 None FRTU3 None FRTU2 None FRTU1 If this parameter is set to a small value. This parameter takes effect on the downlink. this parameter can be set to 4 or 7 to improve the success rate of MS access. If this parameter is set to a great value. a long time lasts before an MS disconnects a call. RET radioLinkTimeout maxNumberRetransmission None T200S SDCCH LAPDm T200 .

Under the same frame erasure rate (FER). it is difficult to select candidate target cells. At present.If the transmission of the physical information over the FACCH is not complete. The value of AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode. the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. the AMR coding supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. Otherwise. The value of AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode. the expiration is invalid because the time is shorter than an FACCH period. The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR HR calls. the BTS needs to retransmit the physical information to the MS when the timer T3105 expires for the first time. the speech quality is improved.Considering the previous factors. The physical information is sent over the FACCH. NY1 The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value.The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. AHRLT The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. If it is set to a too small value. the default value of this parameter is 70 ms. T3105 AMR HR Radio Link Timeout AMR Radio Link Timeout DRT drThreshold The value of this parameter can be increased when handover becomes slow or the handover success rate decreases because of clock problems or poor transmission. If the AMR function is enabled. the cells with heavy loads are selected as candidate target cells so that the handover does not make sense.An MS can be handed over only when Max Resend Times of Phy Info multiplied by Radio Link Timeout is greater than the interval between EST IND and HO DETECT (120-180 ms). If the value of the parameter is too low. If the value of T3105 is smaller than or equal to 18 ms. If it is set to a too small value. Four TDMA frames are sent each time at the interval of 18 ms. maxNumberOfRepetitions amrHoHrThrUlRxQual QURH amrHoHrThrDlRxQual QDRH amrHoFrThrUlRxQual QURF amrHoFrThrDlRxQual QDRF . the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. ARLT If the value of the parameter is too high. 20 ms is the reasonable minimum value for this parameter. the handover fails. The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too small value. the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. the speech quality is improved. the AMR coding supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR function is enabled. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER). The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR FR calls.

The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special conditions. TRHO When the authentication and ciphering procedures are enabled on the existing network. and thus the handover success rate is decreased. extra interference may be introduced when aggressive frequency reuse pattern is used. the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. If it is set to a lower value. but the network interference is reduced. EPB It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. Proper use of PBGT handovers helps to reduce cross coverage and to avoid co-channel interference and adjacent channel interference. QDR If this parameter is set to Yes. If it is set to a lower value. hoThresholdsQualDL POPT msPwrOptLev None ISHO Huawei recommends that the PBGT handover algorithm be enabled. trhoTargetLevel ESD enableSDCCHHandover None PET penaltyTime None TEO temporaryOffset . the MS does not use the maximum transmit power. FMT fastMovingThreshold enablePwrBudgetHandover If this parameter is set to YES. this parameter can be set to Yes. QUR hoThresholdsQualUL The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of non-AMR calls.The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of non-AMR calls.

If yes. QUA cellBarQualify The MS obtains C1 and C2 of the serving cell at a minimum interval of 5s. If this parameter is set to a too great value. ping-pong location updates occur and the signaling load on the SDCCH increases.The value of CBQ affects the access of the MS to the system. C2 of an appropriate non-serving cell exceeds that of the serving cell in 5s and the following conditions are met: system information 3 and 4 of the serving cell) exceeds C2 of the serving cell in 5s. Thus. A better cell exists if the above conditions are met. A cell reselection is performed in the last 15s. If this parameter is set to a too small value.If a better cell exists. HYS cellReselectHysteresis cellReselectParamInd . and the C2 of the new cell minus 5 dB constantly exceeds the C2 of the serving cell in 5s. When necessary. PI An MS does not respond to pagings during location update. the cell that the MS camps on for a long time may not be the best after the LA changes. the path loss is too large. the connection rate drops if cell reselection is performed. The MS constantly checks whether a cell reselection is required by referring to following conditions: Whether the path loss (C1) of the current serving cell drops below 0 within 5s. the MS reselects a cell. the MS re-calculates C1 and C2 value of all non-serving cells (adjacent cells).and does not go to the previous cell within 5s.

NCC Permitted should be set properly to avoid too many call drops. and the load on the A interface. and VLR. Um interface. In the GSM system. such as the processing capability of the MSC and BSC. it is possible that the MS is identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends no location update request for a long period. the larger the number of paging sub-channels in a cell and the smaller the number of MSs on each paging sub-channel. The location update period in the MSC must be greater than that in the BSC. it is possible that a powered-on MS is identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends no location update request within a long period. To properly specify the value of this parameter. MFR noOfMultiframesBetweenPagin g None AG noOfBlocksForAccessGrant The most significant three bits of BSIC for all cells map with the NCC. PER timerPeriodicUpdateMS The larger this parameter is set. HLR. When the MS reselects another cell (in the same LAC). Abis interface. or 25. the MS is restarted through T3212 timeout if the T3212 of the new cell differs from that of the original cell. the value of this parameter should be the same in all cells. In this case." even though the called MS is on. such as 16.It is recommended that you select a greater value. When this parameter differs in the cells of the same LAC. in the area with light traffic. such as 2 or 3. PLMN plmnPermitted . Setting this parameter larger can prolong the average service life of MS batteries but increase the delay of paging messages and reduce the system performance. system plays "The subscriber you dial is power off. 20. in the area with heavy traffic. but a smaller value. it is necessary to perform overall and long-term measurement on the entities involved regarding their processing capability and traffic. In an LAC.

this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. and direct access of an MS is not allowed.The CBA function applies to special conditions. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. T3101 T3109 T8 T3121 T3107 T7 . If this timer is set to a higher value. If this timer is set to a higher value. If this timer is set to a higher value. T3122 If this timer is set to a higher value. If this timer is set to a lower value. this parameter should be set to 0. this may influence the immediate assignment success rate. this may influence the handover success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value. The value of CBA affects the network access of an MS. If this timer is set to a lower value. this may increase the channel load and influence the access success rate. this may influence the handover success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value. BAR cellBarred None ATT allowIMSIAttachDetach If this timer is set to a lower value. only handovers are allowed in a cell. If this timer is set to a lower value. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. For a common cell. this may influence the assignment success rate. This condition applies to a dual-network coverage cell. this may influence the handover success rate. If this timer is set to a lower value. If this parameter is set to 1 and Cell Bar Quality (CBQ) is set to 0. T3111 If this timer is set to a higher value. If this timer is set to a lower value. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion.

None BO5 interferenceAveragingProcess None BO4 interferenceAveragingProcess None BO3 interferenceAveragingProcess .

This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS.None BO2 interferenceAveragingProcess None BO1 interferenceAveragingProcess None BO0 On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal quality. QUS interferenceAveragingProcess pcAveragingQualDL / windows size pcAveragingQualUL / windows size . QDS On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. When you configure this parameter. When you configure this parameter. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS.

PC Lower Thresholds Lev DL Rx Level LDR PC Upper Thresholds Lev DL Rx Level UDR . Thus. the conversation quality is degraded. Thus. pcAveragingLevDL / windows size LUS pcAveragingLevUL / windows size If this parameter is set to a too great value. When you configure this parameter. the conversation quality is degraded. the uplink level becomes high without power control. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to a too small value. When you configure this parameter. and call drop may easily occur. LDS On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. If this parameter is set to a too great value. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the battery life is reduced.On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. Thus. This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal levels. the downlink level becomes low. and call drop may easily occur. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. Thus. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. PC Lower Thresholds Qual DL Rx Qual LDR If this parameter is set to a too great value. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. Thus. the quality is good without power control. the downlink level becomes low. the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal levels. the quality is poor without power control. the battery life is reduced. Thus. PC Upper Thresholds Qual DL Rx Qual UDR If this parameter is set to a too great value. the uplink level becomes high without power control. the quality is good without power control. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the quality is poor without power control.

The value of this parameter is equal to that of UL Expected Level at HO Access. PC Upper Thresholds Qual UL Rx Qual UUR If this parameter is set to a too great value. PC Lower Thresholds Lev UL Rx Level LUR If this parameter is set to a too great value. UUR If this parameter is set to a too great value. If this parameter is set to a too small value. and call drop may easily occur.If this parameter is set to a too great value. the battery life is reduced. the quality is good without power control. and call drop may easily occur. Thus. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus. the uplink level becomes low. the signal quality is good without power control. the conversation quality is degraded. the quality is poor without power control. the uplink level becomes high without power control. the uplink level becomes low. the signal quality of the MS is poor without power control. the power control may be delayed. None PC Upper Thresholds Lev UL Rx Level INT SL powerControlInterval rxLevMinCell None PRB bsPRACHBlocks None PBB bsPBCCHBlocks . thus wasting the resources. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to a too great value. If this parameter is set to a too small value. thus the conversation quality is degraded. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. PC Lower Thresholds Qual UL Rx Qual LUR If this parameter is set to a too small value. Thus. Thus. the power control may be performed frequently. Thus. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased.

When network resources are sufficient. the average delay of packet access is long. shortening the time to establish new TBFs and improving data transmission rate. the T3192 should be set to a large value. you need to comprehensively analyze the traffic models of the cell and take the service load of the cell into consideration. T3192 If the timer is set to a lower value. the average delay of packet access is short. However. many resources are not used but occupied for a long time. the value of the T3192 timer depends on the average transmission interval between two successive downlink data. If the download data packets from the network are not received and T3192 does not expire. but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad radio environment increases. the MS can detect the TBF establishment failure within a shorter period. In addition. Therefore. If the timer is set to a higher value. T3168 . the MS releases the TBF resources within a shorter period. GPET gprsPenaltyTime None GTEO gprsTemporaryOffset If this parameter is set to a higher value. the downlink TBF establishment takes a longer period. If the TBF establishment fails. thus shortening the TBF establishment time. the TBF resources (including TFI and timeslots) are reserved for a long time. On one hand.If you do not want a fast-moving MS to access a micro cell. but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad radio environment decreases. if the network sends new downlink PDU data packets. On the other hand. thus increasing the probability of reassignment by the PCU and wasting system resources. that is the GPRS congestion rate is low. the network must initiate a paging or immediate assignment procedure. this parameter should be set to a high value when the coverage area of the micro cell is large. the small timer value increases the probability of the retransmission of the packet access request. If the TBF establishment fails. If the timer is set to a smaller value. If no downlink data needs to be sent. the MS takes a longer period to detect the TBF establishment failure. the network directly sends a Packet Downlink Assignment message to establish a new downlink TBF.

.

.2 .. GSM 1800 (1).. 0…7 N NoYes N Y/N GSM 900 (0) GSM 900 (0).. GSM 800 (5) 255 0…255 No No/BB/RF TA 255 0. GSM 800 (5) 3 characters 2.255 TA 255 2 0.Unit Step Size Default Value GSM 900 (0) Range GSM 900 (0).. otherwise read from RNW db.7 Obligatory in creation when LCSE not connected to any segment. GSM 1900 (2).. GSM 1900 (2). GSM 1800 (1)..3 characters 1 0..

.10 characters Locked (3) N Y/N TA 255 0.16 F - 1…65535 1..-47 N Yes/No Y 1 Yes/No 1....N Yes/No dBm -105 -110..255 ...

.-47 N Yes/No 2 0...2 0 0...N Yes/No dBm -105 -110.63/N ..

.2 0.5dB 0 0…15 0.5dB 2 0…15 .5dB 2 0…15 0.0 0..

.

.

64 4 1. 2.SACCH 4 20 4... 4 or 7 .

dBm -100 -110…-47 5 5...35 .

.640 dB 10 0 0.... -47/ N N Yes/No sec 20 20 20..70 ..4 0.....7 4 0.255 dBm N -109...7 dBm N -110... -47/ N Yes Yes/No SACCH 0 0.

14 .N Y/N N Y/N dB 4 0...

.5 0 / 0..25.5 4 2...hours 0.9 1 0...1.7 NCC 0…7 .

N Yes/No Y Yes/No .

..-47 dBm -95 -110.-47 ...dBm -47 -47…FIXED dBm -90 -110.

.dBm -100 -110......-47 dBm -105 -110..-47 dBm -110 -110…FIXED SACCH 1 1.32 SACCH 1 1..32 .

..32 SACCH 4 1..32 .SACCH 4 1..

..-47 6 0…12 3 1…4 ..sec dBm 2 -100 0.31 -110..

sec 10s 10 10…320 dB 0 0…70 .

55km)) Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier Allow Dynamic Voltage Adjustment ATT Tx-integer(RACH Timeslot(equals to a TDMA frame.615ms)) Cell_Bar_Access NCC Permitted BS_AG_BLKS_RES BS-PA-MFRAMS Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes) CRH PI Cell_Bar_Qualify CRO(2dB) ACS TO PT(s) SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period (480ms)) Proposed Remarks Value Shall Use Shall Use NA Yes Not matched 0 1 with other vendor No No Yes Yes No Yes No Yes <1000000 NA 0> Tunable based on NA No performan ce 63 Old Value NA NA Yes NO Unit None None None None None Bit Period NO Yes 20 (32 NA Satelite Cells) NA 0 NA 255 NA 1 4 4 Multiframe Multiframe Period Period NA 6dB Yes 0 0 No 0 NA 24 40 6dB Yes 0 0 No 0 0 24 Need to standerdiz e To identify MS request 16 at -94 dBm or worst coverage Tunable based on performan ce Ericsson 60 RACH Busy Threshold 5 Paging Times 1 1 .4.Parameter Name UL DTX Call Reestablishment Forbidden RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN TCH Immediate Assignment Direct Retry UL PC Allowed DL PC Allowed Encryption Algorithm DL DTX MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.

200 1 60 50 50 150 200 60 60 No 5 5 5 23 29 34 No 4 If use Imm_Ass Retrans. 2(near to Dualband cell) Yes MS MAX Retrans Common Access Control Class Special Access Control Class Emergent Call Disable Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) ECSC All vendor same platform MBR Power Deviation Indication .Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable NA Disable Need to discuss with Huawei 47 Allowed & Recover When Check Res. 2(near to Dualband cell) Yes 2 4 (7 for Satelite Site) Not selected Not selected No 24 Yes 0(for normal cell).Access Level T200 SDCCH(5ms) T200 FACCH/F(5ms) T200 FACCH/H(5ms) T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0(10ms) T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3(10ms) T200 SACCH SDCCH(10ms) T200 SDCCH SAPI3(5ms) Use LAPDm N200 N200 of Establish N200 of Release N200 of SACCH N200 of SDCCH N200 of FACCH/Half rate N200 of FACCH/Full rate Use Imm_Ass Retransmit Parameter NA 0 60 50 50 150 200 60 60 No 5 5 5 23 29 34 No Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit(ms) NA Max Transmit Times of Imm_Ass NA 4 (7 for Satelite Site) Not selected Not selected NA 20 Yes 0(for normal cell). Default Directed Retry Load Access Threshold NA Speech Version NA TRX Aiding Function Control NA None Random Access Error Threshold RACH Min.

Power Deviation(2dB) Serving Band Reporting 1 NA 1 NA 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter Qsearch I NA NA Qsearch C Initial NA NA FDD Q Offset NA NA FDD REP QUANT NA NA FDD MULTIRAT Reporting NA NA FDD Qmin NA NA Qsearch P NA NA 3G Search PRIO NA NA Invalid BSIC Reporting NA NA Scale Order NA NA Qsearch C NA NA 900 Reporting Offset NA NA 900 Reporting Threshold NA NA 1800 Reporting Offset NA NA 1800 Reporting Threshold NA NA FDD Reporting Offset NA NA FDD Reporting Threshold NA NA .

Allow Reassign Allow EMLPP Immediate Assignment Opt. Short Message Uplink Disabled Short Message Downlink Disabled Frequency Band of Reassign Max Assignment Retry Times AMR ACS(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) AMR Starting Mode(F) AMR ACS(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) AMR Starting Mode(H) Co-BSC/MSC Adj SDCCH HO Allowed Intracell HO Allowed Load HO Allowed MS Fast Moving HO Allowed Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed PBGT HO Allowed Level HO Allowed Fringe HO Allowed BQ HO Allowed TA HO Allowed

No No NA No No No NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA No No Yes No No No Yes NA NA NA NA

No No NO No No Same Band 2 165 12 18 26 2 3 3 12 18 26 2 3 3 1 15 12 18 26 2 3 3 12 18 26 2 3 3 0 No No Yes Yes No No Yes NO Yes Yes Yes

Tunable based on performan ce

Tunable based on performan ce

None Tunable based on None performan ce None None

Concentric Circles HO Allowed Interference HO Allowed Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold Edge HO Watch Time(s) Edge HO Valid Time(s) Layer HO Watch Time(s) Layer HO Valid Time(s) PBGT Watch Time(s) PBGT Valid Time(s) Inter-layer HO Threshold Inter-layer HO Hysteresis

NA NA 5 10 5 4 5 4 5 4 NA 3

Yes (for MB cell), No for othres Yes 15 20 5 4 5 4 5 4 25 3

Grade Grade Second Second Second Second Second Second Tunable based on dB performan ce Tunable based on Grade performan ce Second Second

Min DL Level on Candidate Cell Intracell F-H HO Allowed Intracell F-H HO Stat Time(s) Intracell F-H HO Last Time(s) F2H HO th H2F HO th Min Interval for TCH HOs Min Interval for SDCCH HOs Min Interval for Consecutive HOs Min Interval for Emerg.HOs Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed Penalty Allowed MS Power Prediction after HO MR.Preprocessing Transfer Original MR Transfer BS/MS Power Class Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR Allowed M.R Number Lost Filter Length for TCH Level Filter Length for TCH Qual Filter Length for SDCCH Level Filter Length for SDCCH Qual Filter Length for Ncell RX_LEV Filter Length for TA Penalty Level after HO Fail Penalty Time after HO Fail(s) Penalty Level after BQ HO Penalty Time after BQ HO(s)

15 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 6 NA NA Yes No NA NA Yes NA NA 6 NA 2 NA 6 6 NA NA NA NA

10 Yes 5 4 30 10 4 2 6 2 NO Yes No Yes NO Yes Once Every Second 4 6 6 2 3 6 6 30 10 30 10

Second

None

None

Number of MR Number of MR None Number of MR Number of MR

dB

Penalty Level after TA HO Penalty Time after TA HO(s) Penalty Time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fail(s) TA Threshold DL Qual. Threshold UL Qual. Threshold UL Qual. Threshold for Interf.HO DL Qual. Threshold for Interf.HO UL RX_LEV Threshold for Interf.HO DL RX_LEV Threshold for Interf.HO Filter Parameter A1 Filter Parameter A2 Filter Parameter A3 Filter Parameter A4 Filter Parameter A5 Filter Parameter A6 Filter Parameter A7 Filter Parameter A8 Filter Parameter B No Dl Mr.HO Allowed No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO Limit Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit System Flux Threshold for Load HO Load HO Threshold Load Req.on Candidate Cell Load HO Bandwidth Load HO Step Period Load HO Step Level MS Fast-moving Watch Cells MS Fast-moving Valid Cells MS Fast-moving Time Threshold MAX Consecutive HO Times Forbidden time after MAX Times Interval for Consecutive HO Jud. Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO(s) UL Expected Level at HO Access K Bias UL to OL HO Allowed OL to UL HO Allowed RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed TA for UO HO Allowed UO Signal Intensity Difference RX_LEV Threshold RX_LEV Hysteresis RX_QUAL Threshold TA Threshold TA Hysteresis UO HO Watch Time(s) UO HO Valid Time(s)

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 5 5 NA NA NA NA 20 6 NA NA 35 NA Yes Yes NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 0 NA NA

63 10 30 255 50 50 40 40 30 35 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 Yes 60 8 10 5 2 25 10 5 NA NA 15 3 20 6 30 40 35 0 Yes Yes Yes Yes No 0 40 NA 50 63 0 5 4 Need to discuss with Huawei

dB

None None None None None None None None None

dB Second dB None None Times Second Second dB Grade

None None None None None None None dB None Bit Period Bit Period Second Second

Assign Optimum Layer Assign-optimum-level Threshold TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. Subcell in HO of Intra-BSC Incoming-to-BSC HO Optimum Layer OtoU HO Received Level Threshold UtoO HO Received Level Threshold UtoO Traffic HO Allowed Traffic Threshold of Underlay Underlay HO Step Period(s) Underlay HO Step Level Penalty Time of UtoO HO(s) Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail(s) Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail(s) MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail Outgoing-RAT HO Allowed System optimizatio n NA NA NA NA System optimizatio n Underlaid subcell NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA System optimizatio n 35 63 No 0 System optimizatio n Underlaid subcell 20 35 Yes Need to discuss with Huawei 5 5 5 30 5 3 NA 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter None dBm Bit Period None Bit Period None None Grade Grade None Second None Second Second Second None Better 3G Cell HO Allowed NA NA Inter-RAT HO Preference NA NA HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell NA NA RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO NA NA Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO NA NA 3G Better Cell HO Watch Time(s) NA NA 3G Better Cell HO Valid Time(s) NA NA Filter Length for SDCCH MEAN_BEP NA NA Filter Length for TCH MEAN_BEP NA NA . of Imme-Assign Allowed TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref. Pref. TA Pref.

Compensation Allowed NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 30 7 NA 35 25 0 4 30 20 0 4 4 NA 4 NA Yes 1 1 6 4 2 6 16 8 5 10 5 10 16 3 4 4 4 4 Yes .Zone 1 MAX Down Adj. MR. Upper Threshold DL Qual. T3105(10ms) PC Interval UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold UL Qual. AMR MR. Bad Trig Threshold DL Qual.Zone 2 MAX Down Adj. Upper Threshold UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff BTS PC Class AMR PC Interval AMR Filter Length for UL RX_LEV AMR Filter Length for DL RX_LEV AMR Filter Length for UL Qual AMR Filter Length for DL Qual. Lower Threshold Filter Length for UL RX_LEV Filter Length for DL RX_LEV Filter Length for UL Qual. Lower Threshold DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold DL Qual. PC Value by Qual.Filter Length for SDCCH CV_BEP NA NA 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter None 10 ms Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade SACCH Period SACCH Period None Number of MR Number of MR dB dB dB dB dB dB None dB None dB Grade None SACCH Period SACCH Period SACCH Period SACCH Period None Filter Length for TCH CV_BEP NA NA Filter Length for SDCCH REP_QUANT NA NA Filter Length for TCH REP_QUANT Max Resend Times of Phy. Bad Trig Threshold UL Qual. PC Value by RX_LEV MAX Up Adj.Value Qual.Value Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff DL Qual. Number Predicted DL MR. Compensation Allowed UL MR. UL Qual. Filter Length for DL Qual.Info. MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual.Zone 0 MAX Down Adj.Value Qual. Number Predicted MAX Down Adj.

PC Value by Qual. Value Qual. PC Value by Qual. AMR MAX Up Adj.of DL Level Threshold Interf. Number Predicted AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold AMR UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold AMR ULQual. Priority Allowed Active CH Interf. Bad UpLEVDiff AMR DL Qual Bad Trig Threshold AMR DL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff AMR BTS PC Class Idle SDCCH Threshold N1 Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum TCH Minimum Recovery Time(s) Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed Idle TCH Threshold N1 Apply-TCH Decision Period T(m) TCH Traffic Busy Threshold(%) Interf. Lower Threshold AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. PC Value by RX_LEV AMR MAX Up Adj. Bad Trig Threshold AMR UL Qual.AMR UL MR. Zone 0 AMR MAX Down Adj. Meas.Threshold Filter Length for TCH Level Filter Length for TCH Qual. Lower Threshold AMR DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold AMR DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold AMR DL Qual. Number Predicted AMR DL MR.of UL Qual. Upper Threshold AMR DL Qual. Threshold Interf. Value Qual.Allowed Allocation TRX Priority Allowed History Record Priority Allowed Balance Traffic Allowed Interf. NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 80 60 NA NA NA NA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes NA NA NA NA 6 6 2 2 1 1 35 25 0 4 30 20 0 4 6 4 2 6 16 8 5 10 5 10 16 2 80 60 Yes Need to discuss with Huawei 1 50 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 30 50 25 50 6 6 2 2 MR Number MR Number Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade dB dB dB dB dB Grade dB None dB None dB None None Second None Minute Percentag e None None None None None Grade Grade Grade Grade Number of MR Number of MR None None . Zone 1 AMR MAX Down Adj.of DL Qual.of UL Level Threshold Interf. Filter Length for SDCCH Level Filter Length for SDCCH Qual. Upper Threshold AMR UL Qual. Zone 2 AMR MAX Down Adj. AMR UL Qual.

Updata Period of CH Record(min) Updata Freq. Band Threshold 2 (-dBm) Interf. Band Threshold 4 (-dBm) Interf. Band Threshold 0 (-dBm) Interf.of CH Record AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed NA NA NA 30 2 Yes 2 60 Yes 30 30 Need to discuss with Huawei <0110111 000> Yes 20 40 55 70 80 90 3 Need to discuss with Huawei 110 105 98 92 87 85 20 Need to discuss with Huawei 65535 3 2 2 2 2 10 15 80 15 5000 360 Minute None AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold NA TCH req suspend interval(s) Allow Rate Selection Based on Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Overlaid Subcell Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Underlaid Subcell Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted NA NA NA NA Second NA Data service Allowed SMCBC DRX Cell Load0 Threshold Cell Load1 Threshold Cell Load2 Threshold Cell Load3 Threshold Cell Load4 Threshold Cell Load5 Threshold Cell Load Change Delay Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold Interf. Band Threshold 5 (-dBm) Interf.Calculation Period(SACCH period(480ms)) Max RC Power Reduction(2dB) Frame Start Time DC Bias Voltage Threshold Power Output Error Threshold Power Output Reduction Threshold VSWR TRX Unadjusted Threshold VSWR TRX Error Threshold Radio Resource Report Period(s) CCCH Load Indication Period(s) CCCH Load Threshold Overload Indication Period NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA None None NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 15 Second Average RACH Load Timeslot Number NA Antenna Azimuth Angle(Degree) NA . Band Threshold 1 (-dBm) Interf. Band Threshold 3 (-dBm) Interf.

0 (1800) NA Yes NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 5 (900).Included Angle(Degree) NA 360 Discard BCCH TS Power while calculating Power Control in BBHoppin g PWRC Not selected Yes MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH Support Half Rate Abis Flow Control Permitted Aiding Delay Protect Time(min) Directly Magnifier Site Flag Drop Optimize Error Indication (T200 timeout) Drop Optimize Error Indication (unsolicited DM response) Drop Optimize Error Indication (sequence error) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio link fail) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (HO access fail) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (OM intervention) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio resource not available) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (other) Drop Optimize Release Indication Drop Optimize ABIS Territorial Link Failure Drop Optimize Equipment Failure Drop Optimize Forced Handover Failure Drop Optimize No MR For Long Time Drop Optimize Resource Check Drop Optimize Into-Bsc Handover Timeout Drop Optimize Out-Bsc Handover Timeout Drop Optimize Intra-Bsc Out-Cell Handover Timeout Drop Optimize Intra-Cell Handover Timeout Cell Out-of-Service Alarm Switch T3101(ms) ImmAss A Interf Creation Timer(ms) T3103A(ms) T3103C(ms) T7(ms) 5 (900). 0 (1800) Yes Yes 15 No 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Yes 3000 5000 10000 10000 10000 Second None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None ms ms ms ms ms .

T3107(ms) T3121(ms) T8(ms) T3109(ms) T3111(ms) TREESTABLISH(ms) T3122(s) NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 10000 10000 10000 27000 1000 15000 10 ms ms ms ms ms ms ms .

Parameters Table Recommended Value Single band 900MHz Default Multiband Frequency Band Cell_Common GSM900 GSM900&DCS1800 Administrative State Cell_Common Unlocked Unlocked Layer of the Cell Cell_Common 3 3 3 MCC Cell_Common 470 470 None MNC Cell_Common 02 02 None NCC Cell_Common 0~7 0~7 0 BCC Cell_Common 0~7 0~7 0 Cell Priority Cell_Common Prior-1 Prior-1 Prior-1 Activity Status Cell_Common Activated Activated Activated PCU Cell_Common 255 255 255 GPRS Support Cell_Common support GPRS support GPRS not support GPRS Support Baseband FH and EDGE simultaneously Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes .

EDGE Support Cell_Common No No No 8PSK power attenuation grade Cell_Common 0 0 0 Support NACC Cell_Common No No No Support PACKET SI STATUS Cell_Common No No No Support NC2 Cell_Common No No No PCU Support 64 Neighbor Cells Cell_Common No No No Level report switch Cell_Common Support Support Support Cellband Cell_Common 0 2 0 RAC Cell_Common As per plan As per plan As per plan Support DTM Cell_Common Not Support Not Support Not Support Support Enhanced DTM Cell_Common Not Support Not Support Not Support Encryption Algorithm Cell_Common 00000001 00000001 1 FH MODE Cell_Common As per frequency plan As per frequency plan As per frequency plan DL DTX Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes .

55km)) Cell_Common 62 62 62 Cell Extension Type Cell_Common Normal cell Normal cell Normal Cell Cell Antenna Hopping Cell_Common None None None Enhanced Concentric Allowed Cell_Common No Yes Yes Cell Type Cell_Common Normal Cell Concentric Cell Normal cell Attributes of UL And OL Subcells Cell_Common NONE NONE NONE BCCH Concentric Attribute Cell_Common None Underlaid Subcell None UL DTX Cell_Common Shall Use Shall Use Shall Use Call Reestablishment Forbidden Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN Cell_Common 1 1 1 TCH Immediate Assignment Cell_Common No No No Direct Retry Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes UL PC Allowed Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes .MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.

TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site None TEI TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 0 . TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 0 Subrack No. TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 0 Slot No.DL PC Allowed Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes Allow Dynamic Voltage Cell_Common Adjustment Yes Yes Yes TRX Index TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 65535 TRX No. TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 255 Cell Index TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site None Site Index TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 65535 Board Type TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site None Active State TRx Activated Activated Activated Abis Mode TRx Auto Auto Auto Cabinet No.

Out-BSC Subrack No.(8K) TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 255 RSL In Site Port No.(8K) TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 255 RSL Logic No. TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 2048 Hop Type TRx As per frequency plan As per frequency plan None Power Level TRx 0 0 0 Power Type TRx Depends on BTS/site configuration Depends on BTS/site configuration Depends on BTS/site configuration Depends on BTS/site configuration Default HW_Concentric Attribute TRx None TRX Priority TRx Level0 Level0 Level0 Shut Down Enable TRx Enable Enable Enable TCH Rate Adjust Allow TRx Yes Yes No . TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 255 RSL In Site Timeslot No. TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site None Out-BSC Port No. TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 0 Out-BSC Slot No. TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site None Out-BSC Timeslot No.

TRX 8PSK Level TRx 0 0 0 Wireless Link Alarm Flag TRx No No No Abnormal Release Statistic Base TRx 100 100 100 Abnormal Warn Threshold TRx 100 100 100 Abnormal Release Threshold TRx 50 50 50 Statical Period of Notraffic(5min) TRx 48 48 48 Wireless Link Alarm Critical Permit TRx Yes Yes Yes WLA Prompting Recover Period(5min) TRx 12 12 12 Begin Time of WLA Detection(hour) TRx 8 8 8 End Time of WLA Detection(hour) TRx 22 22 22 Up Down Balance Basic TRx Difference 8 8 8 Up Down Balance Floating Range TRx 30 30 30 Up Down Balance Alarm Threshold TRx 80 80 80 Receive Mode TRx Depends on BTS/site configuration Depends on BTS/site configuration None .

Send Mode TRx Depends on BTS/site configuration Depends on BTS/site configuration None Allow Shutdown of TRX TRx Power Amplifier Yes Yes No Antenna Hopping Index TRx No No No Power Finetune TRx Default Default Default TRX Antenna Hopping TRx None None None Reverse Out-BSC Slot No. TRx 255 255 255 Reverse Out-BSC Port No.(8K) TRx 255 255 255 Transmission Type of Abis Interface TRx TDM TDM TDM Maximum PDCH numbers of carrier TRx 8 8 8 MaxAbisTSOccupied TRx 32 32 32 Co-TRX for Dynamic Transmission Diversity(PBT) TRx 255 255 255 . TRx 255 255 255 Reverse Out-BSC Timeslot No.(8K) TRx 255 255 255 Reverse RSL In Site Port No. TRx 255 255 255 Reverse RSL In Site Timeslot No.

InHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535 65535 HubHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535 65535 TRXNoInHub TRx 255 255 255 XPUSlotNo TRx 0 0 0 TRX Ability TRx 1 1 PhysicalPassNo TRx 1 1 Priority TRx NONE QTRU Priority TRx 255 255 RevInHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535 65535 Time Slot Power Rerserve TRx 0 0 0 Allow Dynamic Voltage Basic_Parameter Adjustment Yes Yes Yes Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km)) Basic_Parameter 63 63 62 DL DTX Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes .

Encryption Algorithm Basic_Parameter 1 1 1 DL PC Allowed Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes UL PC Allowed Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes Direct Retry Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes TCH Immediate Assignment Basic_Parameter No No No RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN Basic_Parameter 1 1 8 Call Reestablishment Forbidden Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes UL DTX Basic_Parameter Shall Use Shall Use Shall Use GSM900 Band Traffic Load Share Threshold CH_MGT 25 25 25 Channel Assignment Allowed for Insufficient CH_MGT Power No No Yes Qtru Down Link Path Loss Compensation CH_MGT 4 4 4 Qtru Estimate Bts Power CH_MGT 35 35 35 Qtru Down Power Inadequate Last Time CH_MGT 3 3 3 Qtru Down Power Inadequate Stat Time CH_MGT 5 5 5 .

Qtru Power Sharing CH_MGT None None None Observed time of uplink received level difference Duration of uplink received level difference CH_MGT 5 5 5 CH_MGT 4 4 4 Smooth factor of uplink received level CH_MGT 6 6 6 Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels Allow Rate Selection Based on Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load Tch Traffic Busy Underlay Threshold CH_MGT 100 100 100 CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes CH_MGT 50 50 50 Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Overlaid CH_MGT Subcell 50 50 50 Flex HSN Switch CH_MGT Close Close Close Flex MAIO Switch CH_MGT Close Close Close Fix Abis Prior Choose CH_MGT Abis Load Threshold(%) 80 80 80 Flex Abis Prior Choose CH_MGT Abis Load Threshold(%) 80 80 80 TCH req suspend interval(s) CH_MGT 60 60 60 AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold CH_MGT 40 40 40 .

CH_MGT Yes Yes 6 Filter Length for TCH Level CH_MGT 6 6 4 Interf.Threshold CH_MGT 40 40 40 Interf.of UL Level Threshold CH_MGT 10 10 10 History Record Priority CH_MGT Allowed Yes Yes Yes Allocation TRX Priority CH_MGT Allowed Yes Yes Yes Active CH Interf.AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed CH_MGT As per plan As per plan As per plan Update Freq. 2 2 2 Filter Length for SDCCH CH_MGT Level As per frequency plan As per frequency plan As per frequency plan Filter Length for TCH Qual.of UL Qual. Meas.of CH Record CH_MGT 2 2 2 Update Period of CH Record(min) CH_MGT 30 30 30 Filter Length for SDCCH CH_MGT Qual.Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes . Threshold CH_MGT 40 40 40 Interf.of DL Level Threshold CH_MGT 25 25 25 Interf.of DL Qual.

th3(H) Call_Control 30 30 63 .hyst3(H) Call_Control 10 10 15 AMR DL Coding Rate adj. Priority Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes TCH Traffic Busy Threshold(%) CH_MGT 1 50 50 TIGHT BCCH Switch CH_MGT No No No Dynamic Transmission Diversity(PBT) CH_MGT Supported Not Support DPBT Not Support Channel Allocate Strategy CH_MGT Capability preferred Capability preferred Capability preferred Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes TCH Minimum Recovery Time(s) CH_MGT 60 60 60 Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum CH_MGT 80 80 80 Idle SDCCH Threshold N1 CH_MGT 2 2 2 AMR Starting Mode(H) Call_Control 2 2 2 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) Call_Control 2 2 4 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.Interf.hyst2(H) Call_Control 4 4 4 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.

hyst1(H) Call_Control 2 2 4 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) Call_Control 10 10 15 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) Call_Control 18 18 26 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) Call_Control 4 4 3 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) Call_Control 12 12 14 AMR ACS(H) Call_Control 1101 1101 1101 AMR Starting Mode(F) Call_Control 2 2 2 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) Call_Control 18 18 24 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) Call_Control 2 2 2 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) Call_Control 4 4 4 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) Call_Control 6 6 3 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) Call_Control 30 30 63 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) Call_Control 38 38 30 .th1(H) Call_Control 12 12 16 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.

hyst3(F) Call_Control 5 5 1 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) Call_Control Yes Yes 18 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) Call_Control 2 2 2 AMR UL Coding Rate adj. No No No Abis Resource Adjustment TCHH Function Switch Call_Control No No No .hyst1(F) Call_Control 4 4 2 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) Call_Control 20 20 12 AMR ACS(F) Call_Control 11100100 11100100 11100100 Max Assignment Retry Call_Control Times 2 2 1 Frequency Band of Reassign Call_Control Same Band Different Band Different Band Short Message Downlink Disabled Call_Control No No No Immediate Assignment Call_Control Opt.th1(F) Call_Control As per plan As per plan As per plan AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) Call_Control 28 28 22 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) Call_Control As per frequency plan As per frequency plan As per frequency plan AMR UL Coding Rate adj.AMR DL Coding Rate adj.

Allow EMLPP Call_Control No No No Allow Reassign Call_Control Yes Yes Yes TDD Cell Threshold Call_Control 1 0 0 TDD Cell offset Call_Control 0 0 0 Best TDD Cell Number Call_Control 1 1 1 TDD Cell Reselect Diversity(dB) Call_Control 8 8 8 FDD Reporting Threshold Call_Control 0 0 0 FDD Reporting Offset Call_Control 0 0 0 1800 Reporting Threshold Call_Control 0 0 0 1800 Reporting Offset Call_Control 0 0 0 900 Reporting Threshold Call_Control 0 0 0 900 Reporting Offset Call_Control 0 0 0 Qsearch C Call_Control 15 15 15 Scale Order Call_Control +0dB +0dB +0dB .

Invalid BSIC Reporting Call_Control No No No 3G Search PRIO Call_Control Yes Yes Yes Qsearch P Call_Control 15 15 15 FDD Qmin Call_Control 0 0 0 FDD MULTIRAT Reporting Call_Control 2 2 2 FDD REP QUANT Call_Control RSCP RSCP RSCP FDD Q Offset Call_Control 8 8 8 Qsearch C Initial Call_Control Use Qsearch_I Use Qsearch_I Use Qsearch_I Qsearch I Call_Control 15 15 15 Serving Band Reporting Call_Control 3 3 3 Power Deviation(2dB) Call_Control 1 1 1 Power Deviation Indication Call_Control Yes Yes Yes MBR Call_Control 0 0 0 ECSC Call_Control No Yes NO .

Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms)) 24 24 52 Emergent Call Disable Call_Control No No No Special Access Control Call_Control Class 00000 00000 00000 Common Access Control Class Call_Control 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 MS MAX Retrans Call_Control 4 Times 4 Times 4 Times Max Transmit Times of Call_Control Imm_Ass 2 2 2 Max Delay of Imm_Ass Call_Control Retransmit(ms) 4 4 4 Use Imm_Ass Call_Control Retransmit Parameter No No No N200 of FACCH/Full rate Call_Control 34 34 34 N200 of FACCH/Half rate Call_Control 29 29 29 N200 of SDCCH Call_Control 23 23 23 N200 of SACCH Call_Control 5 5 5 N200 of Release Call_Control 5 5 5 N200 of Establish Call_Control 5 5 5 .

Access Level(dbm) Call_Control -115 -115 -115 Random Access Error Threshold Call_Control 200 200 180 TRX Aiding Function Control Call_Control Allowed & Recover When Check Res Allowed & Recover When Check Res TRX Aiding Not Allowed Speech Version Call_Control 11 11 11 AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms)) AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms)) 24 24 52 24 24 64 .Use LAPDm N200 Call_Control No No No T200 SDCCH SAPI3(5ms) Call_Control 60 60 60 T200 SACCH SDCCH(10ms) Call_Control 60 60 60 T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3(10ms) Call_Control 200 200 200 T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0(10ms) Call_Control 150 150 150 T200 FACCH/H(5ms) Call_Control 50 50 50 T200 FACCH/F(5ms) Call_Control 50 50 50 T200 SDCCH(5ms) Call_Control 60 60 60 RACH Min.

HO 30 30 30 TDD Better 3G Cell HO HO Allowed No No 0 TDD 3G Better Cell HO HO Valid Time(s) 4 4 4 TDD 3G Better Cell HO HO Watch Time(s) 5 5 5 TDD RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO HO 50 50 50 TDD HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell HO 25 25 25 .Info.AHR SACCH MultiFrames(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms)) AFR SACCH MultiFrames(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms)) 24 24 32 24 24 48 Directed Retry Load Access Threshold Call_Control 75 75 85 Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable Call_Control Disable Disable Disable Paging Times Call_Control 2 2 4 RACH Busy Threshold Call_Control 16 16 16 SACCH MultiFrames(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms)) 24 24 31 T3105(10ms) HO 7 7 7 Max Resend Times of Phy.

TDD Inter-RAT HO Preference HO Preference for 2G Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold Cell By Threshold Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold Quick Handover Offset(dB) HO 68 68 68 Quick Handover Punish HO Value(dB) 63 63 63 Quick Handover Punish HO Time(s) 10 10 10 Ignore Measurement Report Number HO 1 1 1 Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number HO 4 4 4 Serving Cell Filter Length MR Number HO 4 4 4 Quick Handover Last Time (0.5s) HO 3 3 3 Quick Handover Static HO Time(0.5s) 4 4 4 Quick Move Speed Threshold(m/s) HO 80 80 80 Quick Handover Down HO Trigger Level(dB) 63 63 63 Quick Handover Up Trigger Level(dB) HO 63 63 63 Inner Cell Serious HO OverLoad Threshold(%) 90 90 90 Number of Satisfactory HO Measurements(s) As per plan As per plan As per plan .

Total Number of Measurements(s) HO 5 5 5 Inter UL And OL Subcells HO Penalty Time(s) HO 5 5 5 Outgoing OL Subcell HO HO level Threshold(dB) 25 25 25 Incoming OL Subcell HO HO level Threshold(dB) As per frequency plan As per frequency plan As per frequency plan Step Length of OL Subcell Load HO(dB) HO Yes Yes 5 OL Subcell Load HO Diversity HO Period(s) 10 10 10 Load HO of OL Subcell HO to UL Subcell Enabled No No No Modified Step Length of UL Load HO Period(s) HO 1 1 1 Step Length of UL Subcell Load HO(dB) HO 5 5 5 UL Subcell Load Hierarchical HO Period(s) HO 5 5 5 Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries of HO UL And OL Subcells(dB) Distance Between Boundaries of UL And OL Subcells(dB) Allowed Flow Control Level of UL And OL Subcell HO 2 2 2 HO 10 10 10 HO 10 10 10 UL Subcell Serious HO Overload Threshold(%) 90 90 90 .

UL Subcell General HO Overload Threshold(%) 1 80 80 Assignment Optimization of OL HO Subcell Allowed Or Not Assignment Optimization of UL HO Subcell Allowed Or Not No No No Yes Yes Yes UL Subcell Lower Load HO Threshold(%) 50 50 50 Better 3G Cell HO Allowed HO No No No 3G Better Cell HO Valid HO Time(s) 4 4 4 3G Better Cell HO Watch Time(s) HO 5 5 5 Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO HO 35 35 35 RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO HO 50 50 50 HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell HO 25 25 25 Inter-RAT HO Preference HO Preference for 2G Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold Cell By Threshold Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold Ps UtoO HO Received Level Threshold HO 35 35 35 Ps OtoU HO Received Level Threshold HO 25 25 25 ReceiveQualThrshAMR HO HR 60 60 60 .

ReceiveQualThrshAMR HO FR 65 65 65 En Iuo In Cell Load Classification HO Step HO 5 5 5 En Iuo In Cell Load Classification HO Period HO 5 5 5 En Iuo Out Cell Serious HO OverLoad Threshold 90 90 90 En Iuo Out Cell General HO OverLoad Threshold 85 85 85 En Iuo Out Cell Low Load Threshold HO 30 30 20 MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail HO 3 3 3 Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail(s) HO 10 10 10 Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail(s) HO 40 40 40 Penalty Time of UtoO HO(s) HO 10 10 10 Underlay HO Step Level HO 5 5 5 Underlay HO Step Period(s) HO 5 5 5 UtoO Traffic HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes UtoO HO Received Level Threshold HO 32 32 35 .

HO 63 63 63 Assign-optimum-level Threshold HO 35 35 35 Assign Optimum Layer HO System Optimization System Optimization System Optimization UO HO Valid Time(s) HO 4 4 4 UO HO Watch Time(s) HO 5 5 5 TA Hysteresis HO 0 0 0 TA Threshold HO 63 63 63 RX_QUAL Threshold HO 50 50 60 RX_LEV Hysteresis HO 5 5 5 .OtoU HO Received Level Threshold HO 18 18 25 Incoming-to-BSC HO Optimum Layer HO Underlaid Subcell Underlaid Subcell Underlaid Subcell Pref. Subcell in HO of Intra-BSC HO System Optimization System Optimization System Optimization TA Threshold of ImmeHO Assign Pref. of ImmeAssign Allowed HO No No No TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. 0 0 0 TA Pref.

HO 6 6 6 .RX_LEV Threshold HO 35 35 35 UO Signal Intensity Difference HO 0 0 0 TA for UO HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed HO No No No RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes OL to UL HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes UL to OL HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO HO 80 80 80 RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO HO 4 4 3 K Bias HO 0 0 0 UL Expected Level at HO Access HO 30 30 30 Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO(s) HO 40 40 40 Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO HO 30 30 30 Interval for Consecutive HO Jud.

Forbidden time after MAX Times HO 20 20 20 MAX Consecutive HO Times HO 3 3 3 MS Fast-moving Time Threshold HO 15 15 15 MS Fast-moving Valid Cells HO 2 2 2 MS Fast-moving Watch HO Cells 3 3 3 Load HO Step Level HO 5 5 5 Load HO Step Period HO 10 10 10 Load HO Bandwidth HO 25 25 25 Load Req.on Candidate HO Cell 75 75 75 Load HO Threshold HO 85 85 85 System Flux Threshold HO for Load HO 10 10 10 ULQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60 60 DLQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60 60 ULQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 60 65 .

DLQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 60 65 RXLEVOff HO 5 5 5 RXQUAL12 HO 50 50 50 RXQUAL11 HO 51 51 51 RXQUAL10 HO 52 52 52 RXQUAL9 HO 53 53 53 RXQUAL8 HO 54 54 54 RXQUAL7 HO 55 55 55 RXQUAL6 HO 56 56 56 RXQUAL5 HO 57 57 57 RXQUAL4 HO 58 58 58 RXQUAL3 HO 59 59 59 RXQUAL2 HO 60 60 60 RXQUAL1 HO 70 70 70 .

Ul Qual HO Limit HO 60 60 60 No Dl Mr.Cons.HO Allowed HO No No No Filter Parameter B HO 0 0 0 Filter Parameter A8 HO 10 10 10 Filter Parameter A7 HO 10 10 10 Filter Parameter A6 HO 10 10 10 Filter Parameter A5 HO 10 10 10 Filter Parameter A4 HO 10 10 10 Filter Parameter A3 HO 10 10 10 Filter Parameter A2 HO 10 10 10 Filter Parameter A1 HO 10 10 10 UL Qual. Threshold HO 60 60 60 . Threshold HO 60 60 60 DL Qual.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit HO 8 8 8 No Dl Mr.

Emergency HO TA Threshold HO 255 255 255 DtxMeasUsed HO Open Open Open CfgPenaltyTimer HO 255 255 255 UmPenaltyTimer HO 10 10 10 RscPenaltyTimer HO 5 5 5 Filter Length for TCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK HO 6 6 6 Filter Length for SDCCH HO NBR_RCVD_BLOCK 2 2 2 Penalty Time after HO AMR TCHF-H HO Fail(s) 30 30 30 Filter Length for TCH REP_QUANT HO 6 6 6 Filter Length for SDCCH HO REP_QUANT 2 2 2 Filter Length for TCH CV_BEP HO 6 6 6 Filter Length for SDCCH HO CV_BEP 2 2 2 Filter Length for TCH MEAN_BEP HO 6 6 6 Filter Length for SDCCH HO MEAN_BEP 2 2 2 .

of preprocessed MR HO Twice every second Twice every second Twice every second .R Number Lost HO 4 4 4 Min Power Level For Direct Try HO 25 25 16 Sent Freq.Penalty Time after TA HO(s) HO 30 30 30 Penalty Level after TA HO HO 63 63 63 Penalty Time after BQ HO HO(s) 15 15 15 Penalty Level after BQ HO HO 63 63 63 Penalty Level after HO HO Fail 30 30 30 Filter Length for TA HO 6 6 4 Filter Length for Ncell RX_LEV HO 6 6 4 Filter Length for SDCCH HO Qual 3 3 2 Filter Length for SDCCH HO Level 3 3 2 Filter Length for TCH Qual HO 6 6 4 Filter Length for TCH Level HO 6 6 4 Allowed M.

Transfer BS/MS Power HO Class Yes Yes Yes Transfer Original MR HO Yes Yes No MR.HOs HO 6 6 4 Min Interval for Consecutive HOs HO 6 6 4 Min Interval for SDCCH HO HOs 2 2 2 Min Interval for TCH HOs HO 4 4 2 ATCBHoSwitch HO Open Open Open TIGHT BCCH HO Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2 TIGHT BCCH HO Watch HO Time(s) 3 3 3 Quick Handover Enable HO NO NO NO .Preprocessing HO No No No MS Power Prediction after HO HO No No No Penalty Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed HO No No No Min Interval for Emerg.

H2F HO Threshold HO 10 10 10 F2H HO Threshold HO 30 30 25 Intracell F-H HO Last Time(s) HO 4 4 4 Intracell F-H HO Stat Time(s) HO 5 5 5 Intracell F-H HO Allowed HO Yes Yes YES Min DL Power on HO Candidate Cell HO 15 15 15 Min UP Power on HO Candidate Cell HO 10 10 10 Inter-layer HO Hysteresis HO 3 3 3 Inter-layer HO Threshold HO 25 25 25 Inter-System Handover HO Enable No No No PBGT Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2 PBGT Watch Time(s) HO 3 3 3 Layer HO Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2 Layer HO Watch Time(s) HO 3 3 3 .

Edge HO AdjCell Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2 Edge HO AdjCell Watch HO Time(s) 3 3 3 Edge HO Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2 Edge HO Watch Time(s) HO 3 3 3 Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold HO 20 20 20 Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold HO 10 10 10 Interference HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes Concentric Circles HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes TA HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes BQ HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes Fringe HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes Level HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes PBGT HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed HO No No No .

MS Fast Moving HO Allowed HO No No No Load HO Allowed HO No No No Intracell HO Allowed HO No No No SDCCH HO Allowed HO No No No Co-BSC/MSC Adj HO Yes Yes Yes PT(s) Idle_Mode 0 0 0 TO Idle_Mode 0 0 0 ACS Idle_Mode No No No CRO(2dB) Idle_Mode 0 0 0 Cell_Bar_Qualify Idle_Mode No No No PI Idle_Mode Yes Yes Yes CRH Idle_Mode 6dB 6dB 6dB Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes) Idle_Mode 60 60 20 BS-PA-MFRAMS Idle_Mode 4 Multiframe Period 4 Multiframe Period 2 Multiframe Period .

BS_AG_BLKS_RES Idle_Mode 2 2 2 NCC Permitted Idle_Mode 11111111 11111111 11111111 Cell_Bar_Access Idle_Mode No No No Tx-integer Idle_Mode 32 32 32 ATT Idle_Mode Yes Yes Yes Timer for UL Data Forward(ms) Other_Properties 10 10 10 WaitforRelIndAMRHR Other_Properties 26000 26000 26000 WaitforRelIndAMRFR Other_Properties 34000 34000 34000 T3103C(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000 T3122(s) Other_Properties 10 10 10 TREESTABLISH(ms) Other_Properties 15000 15000 15000 T3111(ms) Other_Properties 1000 1000 1000 T3109(ms) Other_Properties 27000 27000 27000 T8(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000 .

T3121(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000 T3107(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000 T7(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000 T3103A(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000 ImmAss A Interf Creation Timer(ms) Other_Properties 5000 5000 5000 T3101(ms) Other_Properties 3000 3000 3000 Send Classmark Enquiring Result To MSC Enable Other_Properties No No No Enquire Classmark After In-BSC Handover Other_Properties Enable No No No Base Hop Support Close TRX Allowed Other_Properties No No No Qtru Signal Merge Switch Other_Properties No No No MAX Paging Message Number 0f Cell In Period Average Paging Message Number 0f Cell In Period Other_Properties 220 220 220 Other_Properties 180 180 180 Paging Numbers of one Other_Properties Optimizing Msgs 5 5 5 Interval For Sending Paging Optimizing Msgs Other_Properties 2 2 2 .

Paging Messages Optimize at Abis Interface Other_Properties Forced turn-on Forced turn-on Forced turn-on Interfere Band Stat Algorithm Type Other_Properties Interference Band Measurement Algorithm II Interference Band Interference Band Measurement Measurement Algorithm II Algorithm II Cell Out-of-Service Alarm Switch Other_Properties Yes Yes Yes Lower-level sublink resources preemption Other_Properties switch No No No Sublink resources preemption switch Other_Properties No No No Force MS to Send Ho Access SWITCH Other_Properties Yes Yes Yes IntraCellHo to Ass SWITCH Other_Properties No No No Frequency Scan Result Other_Properties Type Maximum/Mean Value Maximum/Mean Value Maximum/Mean Value Drop Optimize IntraOther_Properties Cell Handover Timeout 1 1 1 Drop Optimize IntraBsc Out-Cell Handover Other_Properties Timeout 1 1 1 Drop Optimize Out-Bsc Other_Properties Handover Timeout 1 1 1 Drop Optimize Into-Bsc Other_Properties Handover Timeout 1 1 1 Drop Optimize Resource Check Other_Properties 1 1 1 Drop Optimize No MR Other_Properties For Long Time 1 1 1 .

Drop Optimize Forced Other_Properties Handover Failure 1 1 1 Drop Optimize Equipment Failure Other_Properties 1 1 1 Drop Optimize ABIS Other_Properties Territorial Link Failure 1 1 1 Drop Optimize Release Other_Properties Indication 1 1 1 Drop Optimize Connection Failure (other) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio resource not available) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (OM intervention) Other_Properties 1 1 1 Other_Properties 1 1 1 Other_Properties 1 1 1 Drop Optimize Connection Failure (HO Other_Properties access fail) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio link fail) Drop Optimize Error Indication (sequence error) 1 1 1 Other_Properties 1 1 1 Other_Properties 1 1 1 Drop Optimize Error Indication (unsolicited Other_Properties DM response) Drop Optimize Error Indication (T200 timeout) 1 1 1 Other_Properties 1 1 1 Directly Magnifier Site Other_Properties Flag No No No Aiding Delay Protect Time(min) Other_Properties 15 15 15 .

Abis Flow Control Permitted

Other_Properties

Yes

Yes

Yes

Support Half Rate

Other_Properties

Yes

Yes

No

MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH Other_Properties

5

5

5

PWRC

Other_Properties

Yes

Yes

Yes

ActGene

Other_Properties

5

5

5

PS LowPri ServicePRI

Other_Properties

6

6

6

PS HighPRI ServicePRI

Other_Properties

4

4

4

CS Data ServicePRI

Other_Properties

5

5

5

CS Voice ServicePRI

Other_Properties

3

3

3

Included Angle(Degree)

Other_Properties

360

360

360

Antenna Azimuth Angle(Degree)

Other_Properties

360

360

360

Average RACH Load Timeslot Number

Other_Properties

5000

5000

5000

Overload Indication Period

Other_Properties

15

15

15

CCCH Load Threshold

Other_Properties

80

80

80

CCCH Load Indication Period(s)

Other_Properties

15

15

15

Radio Resource Report Other_Properties Period(s)

10

10

10

Frequency Adjust Value

Other_Properties

36671

36671

36671

Frequency Adjust Switch

Other_Properties

NO

NO

NO

VSWR TRX Error Threshold

Other_Properties

2

2

2

VSWR TRX Unadjusted Other_Properties Threshold

2

2

2

Power Output Reduction Threshold

Other_Properties

2

2

2

Power Output Error Threshold

Other_Properties

2

2

2

DC Bias Voltage Threshold

Other_Properties

3

3

3

Frame Start Time

Other_Properties

65535

65535

65535

Max RC Power Reduction(2dB)

Other_Properties

5

5

5

Interf.Calculation Period(SACCH period(480ms))

Other_Properties

20

20

20

Interf. Band Threshold Other_Properties 5 (-dBm)

85

85

85

Interf. Band Threshold Other_Properties 4 (-dBm)

87

87

87

Interf. Band Threshold Other_Properties 3 (-dBm)

92

92

92

Interf. Band Threshold Other_Properties 2 (-dBm)

98

98

98

Interf. Band Threshold Other_Properties 1 (-dBm)

105

105

105

Interf. Band Threshold Other_Properties 0 (-dBm)

110

110

110

Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold

Other_Properties

3

3

50

SMCBC DRX

Other_Properties

Yes

Yes

Yes

Data service Allowed

Other_Properties

118

118

118

Power boost before HO enabled or not

Other_Properties

StartUp

StartUp

not StartUp

Voice quality report switch

Other_Properties

report

report

not report

Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted

Other_Properties

255

255

Yes

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 8(dB)

Power_Control

53

53

53

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 7(dB)

Power_Control

50

50

50

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 6(dB)

Power_Control

47

47

47

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 5(dB)

Power_Control

43

43

43

Lower Threshold(dB) HwIII UL AFS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB) Power_Control 12 12 12 Power_Control 16 16 16 Power_Control 12 12 12 Power_Control 16 16 16 Power_Control 16 16 16 Power_Control 22 22 22 HwIII UL FS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB) HwIII UL AFS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB) HwIII UL AHS Rex Qual. Lower Threshold(dB) Power_Control 16 16 16 HwIII UL FS Rex Qual.HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 4(dB) Power_Control 40 40 40 HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 3(dB) Power_Control 30 30 30 HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 2(dB) Power_Control 20 20 20 HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 1(dB) Power_Control 0 0 0 HwIII UL MAX UpStep(dB) Power_Control 8 8 8 HwIII UL MAX DownStep(dB) Power_Control 8 8 8 HwIII UL AHS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB) HwIII UL HS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB) HwIII UL HS Rex Qual. Upper Threshold(dB) Power_Control 22 22 22 .

Power_Control Lower Threshold(dB) 12 12 12 HwIII DL AHS Rex Qual.Exponent Filter Length Power_Control 3 3 3 HwIII UL RexLev Power_Control Exponent Filter Length 3 3 3 HwIII DL MAX UpStep (dB) Power_Control 8 8 8 HwIII DL MAX DownStep(dB) Power_Control 8 8 8 HwIII DL AHS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB) HwIII DL AFS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB) HwIII DL AFS Rex Qual. Slide Window Power_Control 1 1 1 HwIII UL RexLev Slide Window Power_Control 1 1 1 HwIII UL Rex Qual.Adjust Factor Power_Control 6 6 6 HwIII UL RexLev Adjust Power_Control Factor 4 4 4 HwIII UL Rex Qual.HwIII UL RexLev Lower Power_Control Threshold 20 20 20 HwIII UL RexLev Upper Power_Control Threshold 30 30 30 HwIII UL Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB) Power_Control 16 16 16 Power_Control 12 12 12 Power_Control 16 16 16 .

Lower Threshold(dB) Power_Control 16 16 16 HwIII DL HS Rex Qual. Power_Control Exponent Filter Length 3 3 3 HwIII DL RexLev Power_Control Exponent Filter Length 3 3 3 HwIII Traffic Channel Discard MR Number Power_Control 3 3 3 HwIII Signal Channel Discard MR Number Power_Control 1 1 1 . Upper Threshold(dB) Power_Control 22 22 22 HwIII DL RexLev Lower Power_Control Threshold 25 25 25 HwIII DL RexLev Upper Power_Control Threshold 35 35 35 HwIII DL Rex Qual. Slide Window Power_Control 1 1 1 HwIII DL RexLev Slide Window Power_Control 1 1 1 HwIII DL Rex Qual.HwIII DL HS Rex Qual. Adjust Factor Power_Control 6 6 6 HwIII DL RexLev Adjust Power_Control Factor 6 6 6 HwIII DL Rex Qual. Lower Threshold(dB) Power_Control 16 16 16 HwIII DL FS Rex Qual. Upper Threshold(dB) Power_Control 22 22 22 HwIII DL FS Rex Qual.

HwIII Down Link Power Power_Control Control Adjust Period 3 3 3 HwIII Up Link Power Control Adjust Period Power_Control 3 3 3 HwIII Number of lost MRs allowed Power_Control 5 5 5 AMR BTS PC Class Power_Control 16 16 16 AMR DL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control 0 0 0 AMR DL Qual Bad Trig Power_Control Threshold 5 5 5 AMR UL Qual. Zone 2 Power_Control 4 4 4 AMR MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual. Power_Control 4 4 4 AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Power_Control 8 8 8 AMR MAX Up Adj. Bad Trig Power_Control Threshold 5 5 5 AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual. Zone 1 Power_Control 4 4 4 AMR MAX Down Adj. Zone 0 Power_Control 4 4 4 . Value Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control 0 0 0 AMR UL Qual. PC Value by RX_LEV Power_Control 16 16 16 AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual.

Lower Threshold Power_Control 2 2 3 AMR ULQual. Power_Control 6 6 6 AMR Filter Length for UL Qual Power_Control 6 6 6 AMR Filter Length for DL RX_LEV Power_Control 6 6 6 . Power_Control Compensation Allowed Yes Yes Yes AMR Filter Length for DL Qual. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 0 1 AMR DL RX_LEV Lower Power_Control Threshold 30 30 25 AMR DL RX_LEV Upper Power_Control Threshold 40 40 35 AMR UL Qual. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 0 1 AMR UL RX_LEV Lower Power_Control Threshold 25 25 20 AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Power_Control Threshold 35 35 30 AMR DL MR. Number Predicted Power_Control 2 2 0 AMR UL MR. Number Predicted Power_Control 2 2 0 AMR MR.AMR DL Qual. Lower Threshold Power_Control 2 2 3 AMR DL Qual.

PC Value Power_Control by Qual. Bad Trig Threshold Power_Control 5 5 5 UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control 0 0 0 UL Qual.Zone 0 Power_Control 4 4 4 DL MR.Value Qual. Power_Control 4 4 4 MAX Down Adj.AMR Filter Length for UL RX_LEV Power_Control 6 6 6 AMR PC Interval Power_Control 3 3 3 BTS PC Class Power_Control 16 16 16 DL Qual. PC Value by Qual.Zone 2 Power_Control 4 4 4 MAX Down Adj. 8 8 8 MAX Up Adj. Bad Trig Threshold Power_Control 5 5 5 MAX Up Adj.Zone 1 Power_Control 4 4 4 MAX Down Adj.Value Qual. PC Value Power_Control by RX_LEV 16 16 16 MAX Down Adj. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control 0 0 0 DL Qual.Value Qual. Number Predicted Power_Control 2 2 0 .

Power_Control 5 5 5 Filter Length for UL Qual.UL MR. Number Predicted Power_Control 2 2 0 MR. Power_Control 5 5 5 Filter Length for DL RX_LEV Power_Control 5 5 5 Filter Length for UL RX_LEV Power_Control 5 5 5 Power Control Algorithm Switch Power_Control HWII Power Control HWII Power Control HW-II Power Control DL Qual. Compensation Allowed Power_Control Yes Yes Yes Filter Length for DL Qual. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 0 1 DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Power_Control 30 30 25 DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Power_Control 40 40 35 UL Qual. Lower Threshold Power_Control 2 2 3 DL Qual. Lower Threshold Power_Control 2 2 3 UL Qual. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 0 1 UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Power_Control 25 25 20 .

UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Power_Control 35 35 30 PC Interval Power_Control 3 3 3 Constant of Filtering the Collision Signal Strength for Power Control Measured Receive Power Level Channel Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Data_In_PCU pdch pdch pdch BTS Power Attenuation on PBCCH Data_In_PCU -2dB -2dB -2dB Signal Strength Filter Period in Transfer Mode Data_In_PCU 10 10 10 Signal Strength Filter Period in Idle Mode Data_In_PCU 10 10 10 Initial Power Level Data_In_PCU 14 14 14 Alpha Parameter Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 Maximum Value of N3105 Data_In_PCU 10 10 10 Maximum Value of N3103 Data_In_PCU 3 3 3 Maximum Value of N3101 Data_In_PCU 20 20 20 Release Delay of Downlink TBF(ms) Data_In_PCU 2400 2400 2400 Inactive Period of Extended Uplink TBF(ms) Data_In_PCU 2000 2000 2000 .

Release Delay of Nonextended Uplink TBF(ms) Data_In_PCU 120 120 120 Load Reselect Level Threshold Data_In_PCU 40 40 40 GPRS Quality Threshold Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 EDGE 8PSK Quality Threshold Data_In_PCU 16 16 16 EDGE GMSK Quality Threshold Data_In_PCU 7 7 7 Cell Reselect Interval(s) Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Normal Cell Reselection Worsen Level Threshold Normal Cell Reselection Watch Period Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 Data_In_PCU 10 10 10 Cell Normal Reselection Allowed Data_In_PCU Permit Permit Permit Cell Load Reselection Allowed Data_In_PCU Permit Permit Permit Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed Data_In_PCU Permit Permit Permit 2G/3G Cell Reselection Strategy Data_In_PCU Preference for 2G Preference for 2G Cell Cell Preference for 2G Cell Filter Window Size Data_In_PCU 6 6 6 Allowed Measure Report Missed Number Data_In_PCU 4 4 4 .

GBR for POC Service Data_In_PCU 6 6 6 Move Packet Assignment Down to BTS Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support .Load Reselection Receive Threshold(%) Data_In_PCU 60 60 60 Load Reselection Start Threshold(%) Data_In_PCU 85 85 85 MS Rx Quality Worsen Ratio Threshold(%) Data_In_PCU 30 30 30 MS Rx Quality Statistic Threshold Data_In_PCU 200 200 200 Cell Penalty Last Time(s) Data_In_PCU 10 10 10 Cell Penalty Level Data_In_PCU 30 30 30 Cell Reselection Hysterisis Data_In_PCU 6 6 6 Min Access Level Threshold Data_In_PCU 15 15 15 Support QoS Optimize Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support PS Concentric Cell HO Strategy Data_In_PCU No handover No handover No handover between between between underlaid underlaid subcell underlaid subcell subcell and overlaid and overlaid and overlaid subcell subcell subcell 650 650 650 Transmission Delay of POC Service Data_In_PCU Max. GBR for POC Service Data_In_PCU 16 16 16 Min.

Move Immediate Assignment Down to BTS Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support Support Gbr QoS Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support Downlink Default MCS Type Data_In_PCU MCS6 MCS6 MCS6 Downlink Fixed MCS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED Uplink Default MCS Type Data_In_PCU MCS2 MCS2 MCS2 Uplink Fixed MCS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED BEP Period Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 Link Quality Control Mode Data_In_PCU LA LA LA Down TBF threshold From CS4 to CS3 Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 Down TBF threshold From CS3 to CS2 Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 Down TBF threshold From CS2 to CS1 Data_In_PCU 10 10 10 Down TBF threshold From CS3 to CS4 Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Down TBF threshold From CS2 to CS3 Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Down TBF threshold From CS1 to CS2 Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 .

Downlink Default CS Type Data_In_PCU CS2 CS2 CS2 Downlink Fixed CS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED Up TBF threshold From CS4 to CS3 Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 Up TBF threshold From CS3 to CS2 Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 Up TBF threshold From CS2 to CS1 Data_In_PCU 10 10 10 Up TBF threshold From CS3 to CS4 Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Up TBF threshold From CS2 to CS3 Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Up TBF threshold From CS1 to CS2 Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 Uplink Default CS Type Data_In_PCU CS1 CS1 CS1 Uplink Fixed CS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED Background Service Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 THP3 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 THP2 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 3 3 3 THP1 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 .

Timer of Releasing Idle Dynamic Channel Data_In_PCU 20 20 20 Dynamic Channel Conversion Parameter of Concentric Cell Data_In_PCU Only convert at UL Only convert at UL only convert dynamic channel at UL PDCH Downlink Multiplex Threshold Data_In_PCU 80 80 80 PDCH Uplink Multiplex Threshold Data_In_PCU 70 70 70 Downlink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion Uplink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion Maximum Ratio Threshold of PDCHs in a Cell Data_In_PCU 20 20 20 Data_In_PCU 20 20 20 Data_In_PCU 30 30 30 MultiBand reporting Data_In_PCU Report the frequencies of six strongest cells Report the frequencies of six strongest cells Report the frequencies of six strongest cells .channels can be pre-empted empted preempted.ARP3 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 ARP2 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 3 3 3 ARP1 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 6 6 6 Timer of Releasing Abis Timeslot Data_In_PCU 15 15 15 Reservation Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Level of Preempting Dynamic Channel Data_In_PCU All dynamic All dynamic All dynamic channels can be channels can be pre.

Threshold of HCS Signal Strength Data_In_PCU -110dB -110dB -110dB Cell HCS Prior Class Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Maximum TX Power for Access PCH Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Minimum Receiving level for Access Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Exclusive Access Data_In_PCU Not Exclusive Not Exclusive Not Exclusive Cell Access Bar Switch Data_In_PCU Permit Cell Access Permit Cell Access Permit Cell Access Accessorial Hysteresis of Cell Selection In New Routing Area Data_In_PCU 2dB 2dB 2dB Cell Reselection Forbidden Time Data_In_PCU 10sec 10sec 10sec Allow MS to Access to another Cell Data_In_PCU Yes Yes Yes Exceptional Rule for GPRS Reselect Offset Data_In_PCU 0 0 0 GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis Applied to C31 Criterion or not Data_In_PCU c31standard c31standard c31standard GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis Data_In_PCU 2dB 2dB 2dB Support PSI Status Message Data_In_PCU No No No Allow MR Command or not Data_In_PCU No No No .

PSI1 Repetition Period Data_In_PCU 6 6 6 Persistence Level 4 Data_In_PCU 16 16 16 Persistence Level 3 Data_In_PCU 14 14 14 Persistence Level 2 Data_In_PCU 13 13 13 Persistence Level 1 Data_In_PCU 12 12 12 Extension Transmission Timeslots of Random Access Minimum Timeslots between Two Successive Channel Requests Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 4 Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 3 Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 2 Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 1 Data_In_PCU 20 20 20 Data_In_PCU 20 20 20 Data_In_PCU 7 7 7 Data_In_PCU 7 7 7 Data_In_PCU 7 7 7 Data_In_PCU 7 7 7 Access Control Class Data_In_PCU 0 0 0 PRACH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 PAGCH Blocks Data_In_PCU 4 4 4 .

36sec 15.PBCCH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 Cell Reselection MR Period in Packet Transfer Mode Cell Reselection MR Period in Packet Idle Mode Data_In_PCU 0.24sec 0.96sec Data_In_PCU 15.36sec Non-DRX Period Data_In_PCU 0.24sec GPRS Reselection Offset Data_In_PCU -2db -2db -2dB GPRS Penalty Time Data_In_PCU 10sec 10sec 10sec GPRS Temporary Offset Data_In_PCU 10dB 10dB 10dB Extension MR Period Data_In_PCU 60sec 60sec 60sec Extension MR Type Data_In_PCU type1 type1 type1 Interference Frequency Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 NCC_PERMITTED Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 Extension Measurement Command Data_In_PCU em0 em0 em0 BSS Paging Coordination Data_In_PCU Yes Yes Yes Support 11BIT EGPRS Access Data_In_PCU Yes Yes Yes .36sec 15.24sec 0.96sec 0.96sec 0.

Data_In_PCU 12 12 12 Pan Increment Data_In_PCU 4 4 4 Pan Decrement Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 BS_CV_MAX Data_In_PCU 10 10 10 Control Acknowledge Type Data_In_PCU Four access Four access pulses Four access pulses pulses by default by default by default Access Burst Type Data_In_PCU 8bit 8bit 8bit Max. Duration of DRX(s) Data_In_PCU 4 4 4s T3192 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms 500ms T3168 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms 500ms Network Operation Mode Data_In_PCU Network Network Operation Network Operation Mode Mode II Operation Mode II II .Routing Area Color Code Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 Packet Access Priority Data_In_PCU Packet access of level 4 Packet access of level 4 Packet access of level 4 Support SPLIT_PG_CYCLE on CCCH Data_In_PCU No No No Network Control Mode Data_In_PCU nc0 nc0 nc0 Pan Max.

This parameter specifies the base station color code. numbered 1-4 respectively. If the number of the layer is small. and Umbrella. None This parameter specifies whether to enable the general packet radio service (GPRS) in a cell. The priority affects the sequencing of neighbor cells fo None This parameter specifies the number of the PCU that is connected to the E1 link on the Pb interface. the cells at the same layer have the same priority. Micro. The BCC and the NCC form the BSIC. This parameter specifies the activation status of a cell. None . This parameter and Cell Priority determine the priority of a cell. It m The network has four layers. None This parameter specifies the network color code. If a burst is incon Each layer has 16 priorities. If the number of the priority is small. This parameter should be set as required. If this parameter is set to a small value. This parameter specifies the mobile network code (MNC).Description Configuration Policy This parameter specifies the layer where a cell is located. the priority is high. It is used to acknowledge the exact position of the other bits in the same burst and to determine whether the received co-channel signals are useful signals. which is provided by the telecom operator. The BCC identifies the cells with the same BCCH frequency in the neighborhood. numbered 1-4 respectively. This parameter specifies the handover between the cells at the same layer. refer to Layer of the Cell. 1. The activation status can be Not Activated or Activated. This parameter specifies the mobile country code (MCC). a packet control unit (PCU) None must be configured on the BSS side. for example. This parameter along with Layer of the Cell determines the priority of a cell. The GPRS requires the support of the BTS. the priority of the layer is high. The NCC is used to identify networks from area to area. The NCC is unique nationwide. A training sequence is known by both the transmit end and the receive end. Generally. numbered 1-16 respectively. the priority is high. the MCC of China None is 460. The Pico layer is a microcell layer on the 900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequency bands. The NCC and the BCC form the base station identification code (BSIC). and a serving GPRS support node (SGSN) mus The parameter specifies whether the PCU supports baseband FH and EDGE simultaneously. The network designed by Huawei has four layers: Pico. For details. Macro. In addition.

Compared with GSM. this parameter affects the ability of the BSC to report are more than 32 neighbor cells. Compared with the DTM function. The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than transmits Yes: In network control mode NC0. when the MS is in the packet transmission advance. . The DTM function enables an MS to provide both the CS service and the PS service at the same time. DCS1800: The cell This parameter specifies that the network service (NS) in the GPRS packet service state performs location management based on the routing area. The attenuation value has 50 levels. or NC2. The eights bits (from the least significant bit to the most significant bit) specify whether to support the A5/0. NC1. A5/1. This parameter specifies the encryption algorithm supported on the BSS side. the MS of the system information about neighbor cells in In network control mode NC0. If this parameter is set to Not FH. When the CS service is set up.This parameter specifies whether to enable the EDGE function in a cell. the BSC reports the This parameter specifies whether the PCU supports 64 neighbor cells. This function has the following benefits: 1. When the cell is configured with the PBCCH. the network informs the MS of the system information about neighb No: In network control mode NC0. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system int This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell. NC1. when the This parameter specifies whether the cell support the Network Assisted Cell Change MS is in the packet transmission mode. when the This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the PACKET SI STATUS procedure. This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the enhanced DTM function. or NC2. the PS service is not disrupted. A5/2. A5/3. the MS sends the Packet PSI/SI Status None message to the BSC. even if the TRX is configured with FH data. the main and diversity level cannot be None reported. The value of this parameter has eight bits. it cannot None be changed. That is. Each level attenuates by 0. None Each routing area has an ID. The EGPRS is the enhanced GPRS. BTS3001C. The routing area ID is broadcast in the system message. The enhanced data rates for GSM evolution (EDGE) consists of EGPRS and ECSD. the BSC reports the information about a maximum of 32 neighbor cells to the PC For the BTS3002C. The function requires the support of the BSC. EDGE supports high-rate data transmission. indicating that the MS has stored the system message. the MS reports the measurement report of the reference cell and neighbor cells to the BSC. the cell where the TRX serves does not perform FH. GSM900: The cell supports GSM900 frequency band. A This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used. For example. or NC2. If this parameter is set to the number of neighbor cells. the default value is Invalid and cannot be manually modified. No.BTS22C and BTS20. value 0 indic This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Dual Transfer Mode (DTM) function. NC1. None In NC2. The BSC sends th This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Network Control 2 (NC2) function. which improv None This parameter specifies the power attenuation level of a timeslot when 8PSK is used by an EDGE-enabled TRX. BTS3001C+. the default value is Support and can be manually modif This parameter specifies the frequency band of new cells. FH can be used to average the interferen None None None None The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. The BSC controls cell reselection (including normal reselections a If this parameter is set to Yes. Once the frequency band is selected. information about all neighbor cells to the PCU when there In the NACC and NC2 functions.2 None dB. For other types of BTSs. the network informs (NACC) function. the enhanced DTM function enhances the CS setup and release. Each new cell can be allocated frequencies of only one frequency band. mode.

frame number. system information. see GSM Rec. It is n None This parameter specifies whether the SDCCH dynamic allocation is allowed. and paging group are transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. the BSC can assign only an SDCCH None when receiving an initial access request. In This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) function. thus. TRXs in a concentric cell differ in coverage. 05. it is not configured in the UL subcell. In this case. a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. Therefore. the frequency. concentric cell is divided into an OL subcell and a UL subcell. None None This parameter specifies whether the enhanced concentric cell handover is allowed in a concentric cell. that is. In a GSM cell. a This parameter specifies whether a cell is a normal cell or a concentric cell. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. None When the BCCH is configured in the OL subcell. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message. If the value of this parameter is too small. None . Theoretically. If this parameter is set to a too small value. In directed retry. the handover success rate may be affected. This parameter specifies whether the main BCCH is configured in the OL subcell or the UL subcell. In such a case. Due to the difference in coverage. For details. Thus a call may drop. the OL subcell and the UL The concentric cell technology can be combined This parameter specifies whether a cell is the OL subcell or the UL subcell. In this case. If this parameter is set to No. see GSM Rec. a delay of about 120 This parameter specifies whether a cell supports the antenna hopping function. For details. None If the cell supports the enhanced concentric cell function. The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell. A double-timeslot extension cell regards the additional TDMA frame as access delay. two subcells with different radiuses The TRXs of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell can use form a concentric cell. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. 05. thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops.08. many MSs attempt to camp on the cell. the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resu This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. the required level of received signals is low. different frequency reuse modes.08. If this parameter is set to No. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage.This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH when receiving an initial access request. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed. If this parameter is set to Yes. This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. the TCHs (includi This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is allowed. this parameter should be set to No. the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value This parameter specifies whether a cell is an extension cell and specifies how to implement the extended cell. In the scenario of the wide coverage of the UL subcell and the aggressive frequency reuse of the OL subcell. many subscribers may None fail to access the network due to insufficient SDCCH resources. TA equals 219. When the number of GSM subscribers in a cell increases rapidly. this parameter is set to Underlaid Subcell. you must set the parameter based This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. If the MS is in an unfavorable position or t The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. compare the receive level of the MS with OtoU HO Received Level Threshold and with UtoO HO As specified in Huawei concentric cell technology. the average call drop rate decreases. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). This function has the following benefits: 1.

Each BTS is numbered uniquely in a None BSC. can be also manually assigned to meet the requirement of operators. This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect. This parameter specifies the number of a subrack. if you deactivate an activated BTS. This parameter specifies the operating status of the BTS. This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect. For such BTSs as the BTS3012II and BTS3002E. which must be unique in one BTS. TRXs. the timeslots are automatically calculated and assigned. however. This parameter specifies the terminal equipment identifier on the link layer.This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed. the lower-level BTS should be Generally. . This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect. When the BTSs are cascaded. TRXs. It is used to uniquely identify a cell. This parameter specifies the Abis mode of OML. This parameter specifies the TRX number in a cabinet. Cell Index must be unique in one BSC. Conversely. that is. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 8047. all the cells. This parameter is used to differentiate boards with unique identifiers in the BTS. the TRX numbers may be discontinuous. If the logical TRX is not separated from the physical board. This parameter specifies the number of the slot where a board is located. the BSC assigns the Abis time slot of OML automatically.. This parameter specifies the unique index number of each TRX in a BSC. None This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume. None This parameter specifies whether to select different working voltages for the TRX power None amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes. not-activated and activated. This parameter specifies the number of a cabinet. The manually assigned OML timeslot cannot be adjusted when the timeslot is arranged. Internal 2G cells: 0-2047 External 2G cells: 2048-5047 External 3G cells: 5048-8047 None None None This parameter specifies the index number of a BTS. The following two points should be paid attention to: 1. The timeslots. and boards in this BTS will be activated. The default value is calculated automatically. None If you activate a not-activated BTS. and boards in this BTS will be deactivated. all the cells. This parameter specifies the TRX number. This parameter is used to identify multiple signaling links on the same physical link when None the LAPDs are multiplexed on the highway timeslot.

In other similar conditions. The BTS2X supports frame FH and RF FH. If this parameter is set to Not FH. must be set to different E1 ports on the interface board. and the Out-BSC Port No. Generally. this parameter specifies the number of the port None occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) on the Abis interface. which is connected to the local subrack. but do not support This parameter specifies the transmit power level of the TRX. This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GEIUT or GOIUT is located in None the TC subrack. This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC timeslot occupied by the E1 port over the Abis interface. this parameter specifies the number of the None timeslot occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) on the Abis interface. the conversion is allowed. the TCHF that has been converted to the TCHH will be forcedly restored. the higher the TRX priority is. channels are allocated to the TRX with higher priority. however. When the BTS works in ring topology. The E1 timeslot is numbered by 8 kbit/s. or convert the half rate channels to full rate channels. the indoor coverage becomes worse. if the cell is not a concentric one. This parameter specifies the out-BSC port number on the interface board used by the semi-permanent link. versions supports the cross-cabinet baseband FH and RF FH.For example. the transmit power reduces by 2 dB. you should lower the antenna and increase Each time this parameter increases by one level. this parameter is set to UL subcell or OL subcell according to actual conditions. This parameter specifies whether a cell can convert full rate channels to half rate channels. which are numbered from 0 to 31. None This parameter specifies the TRX priority. If the forward ring of the BTSs functions. The doublewhere the TRX serves does not perform FH. Each LAPD link is uniquely numbered in one BSC. BTS reduces. when the antenna is over high and covers When this parameter is set to 0. the TCHH that has been converted to the TCHF will be forcedly None . even if the TRX is configured with FH data. The FH can realize average interference and transceiver BTSs support the baseband FH and RF FH. The BTS3X of all This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used. This parameter cannot be set to the number of the occupied subrack. When the transmit power of a For different types of BTSs. too many cells. the smaller the transmit power is. The smaller this parameter is. When the semi-permanent link is configured on the electrical interface board. timeslot 0 is used for synchronization and cannot be otherwise used. If all semi-permanent links are configured on one interface board. this parameter is set to None by default. the In-BSC Port No. each electrical interface board is configured with 32 E1 ports. This parameter is to be viewed only. frequency diversity. If the forward ring of the BTSs functions. This parameter specifies the logical link number of the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) in the BSC. It is used for Huawei II channel assignment algorithm. If this parameter is set to Yes. Level. if the parameter is set to No. None This parameter specifies the concentric attribute of a cell. This parameter specifies the power levels supported by a TRX. the cell including the timeslot FH and frame FH. The bandwidth of each E1 is divided into 32 timeslots. 0-3 This parameter cannot be set to the number of the occupied E1 port. the tilt of the antenna first. This parameter specifies whether to turn off the power amplifier of the TRX automatically for saving power when the BTS is powered by batteries after the external None power supply is cut off. For a concentric cell. The greater this parameter Adjust the cell coverage area by configuring the Power is. the transmit power level of the TRX is the greatest. and the range is 0-255. including the timeslot FH and frame FH. the forward and reverse links None share one number. the conversion is not allowed.This parameter specifies the number of the TC subrack where the GEIUT/GOIUT is located. The macro BTS and the mini BTS support different power levels. the value range of this parameter is different.

If the radio link prompt alarm is cleared in the WLA Prompting Recover Period. . this parameter needs to be set to meet the frequency requirements. None the uplink and downlink unbalance alarm is generated. If the duration of continuous (not accumulated) no-traffic reaches this threshold. Starting from the period specified by this parameter. this parameter is used to calculate the number of uplink None and downlink unbalance. This parameter takes effect only for the EDGE-enabled TRX. The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than transmits GMSK signals. Dividing Receiver. Assume that Up Down Balance Basic Difference is set to 8 and Up Down Balance Alarm This parameter specifies the permissible uplink and downlink balance floating range relative to Up Down Balance Basic Difference. Independent Receiver. Together with Up Down Balance Floating Range. the wireless link alarm parameter is sent.This parameter specifies the power attenuation levels of the EDGE TRX. If the downlink level minus the uplink level after the power When the percentage of the uplink-and-downlink balance measurement reports in the total valid measurement reports is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter. if the percentage of abnormally released If the percentage of abnormally released channels exceeds the total successful channel activation threshold of a timeslot. Four None Diversity Receiver. The BTS3012. None None If the percentage of abnormally released channel in the total successful channel None activation is less than or equal to this threshold. the noNone traffic alarm is generated. This parameter specifies the statistics base of a sub-channel (the statistical times that a sub-channel that is activated). Thus. the BTS detects the wireless link alarm. The uplink and downlink is not balanced only when the uplink and downlink level exceeds the Up Down Balance Floating Range. The RF receive mode can be Not Support.2 dB. or Main Diversity. If this parameter is set to Yes. an abnormal release clear alarm is sent. BTS3006C. B (the statistics base of a sub-channel on a timeslot) x N (the number of sub-channels on a timeslot) = S (the total times that channels on a timeslot that are activated). For the latest S times of channel activation. This parameter specifies the basic difference value caused by the specified level difference between the uplink channel and the downlink channel. such as 08:00:00 and 14:00:00 in each day. and BTS3002E do not support Main Diversity. None None The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm. This parameter specifies the RF receive mode of the DTRU. an abnormally release alarm is generated. the BTS sends a critical wireless link alarm if the wireless None link prompt alarm is not cleared during the period specified by WLA Prompting Recover Period. The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm. Until the end of the period specified by this parameter. This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the wireless link alarm parameter to the BTS. None Assume that Up Down Balance Basic Difference is set to 8 and Up Down Balance Alarm Threshold is set to 30. BTS3012AE. The detection starts again until the next Begin Time of WLA Detection(hour). BTS3012II. This parameter specifies whether a critical wireless link alarm is sent. the BTS stops None detecting the wireless link alarm and sending the alarm related. If the parameter is set to Yes. If the radio link prompt alarm is not cleared in the WLA Prompting Recover Period. such as 08:00:00 and 14:00:00 in each day. There are 50 levels. None the wireless link alarm parameter is not sent. the corresponding recovery alarm is sent by the BTS. the critical wireless link alarm is sent or not sent according to the settings of the parameter Wireless Link Alarm Critical Permit. and the attenuation between levels is 0. and sends an alarm related. otherwise.

this parameter specifies the number of the RSL None timeslot on the GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB port. 1-HDLC. you can infer that no None TRX supports the PBT together with the current TRX. If the MS is in an unfavorable position or the antenna for the main BCCH TRX is faulty. This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC port where the BSC interface board is located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. or 3-IP. each electrical interface board is configured with 32 E1 ports. This parameter specifies the following: When the antenna hopping function is used. None This parameter is to be viewed only. Thus. the signals on certain frequencies are less affected by Rayleigh fading compared with those without antenna hopping. which are numbered from 0 to None None If this parameter is set to a too great or too small value. . Diversity Transmitter. the number of the slot that holds the interface board. DPBT. which connects the BTS to the BSC. The Antenna Hopping Index corresponds to a TRX number. This parameter specifies the following: Currently. None This parameter specifies the transmission bearer mode of a TRX: 0-TDM. it must be set to the number of the slot that is configured with the interface board. Therefore. In a GSM cell. In some scenarios. and paging group are transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. The BTS3006C and BTS3002E support No Combining. The RF transmit mode can be Not Support. If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions. This parameter can be modified according to the actual requirements. This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC slot where the BSC interface board is located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions. the signals of one TRX can switch between different antennas instead of one TRX corresponding to one antenna. Power Booster Technology. resulting in the failure of channel allocation. DDIVERSITY. the cabinet top output power of the BTS is different from the TRX output power. This parameter specifies the number of the TRX that supports the PBT together with the current TRX. DDIVERSITY This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume. When this parameter is set to the default value 255. When the monitoring timeslot is configured on the electrical interface board. this parameter specifies the number of the port None occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the RSL link on the Abis interface. the frequency. None This parameter specifies the maximum number of PDCHs allocated to a TRX. system information. or Transmitter Independent or Combining. No Combining. the TRX has different losses if it is combined on different tributaries. and the output power difference before and after the combination is not an integral multiple of 2 dB. That is. when the BSC performs the static power control on the TRX. None Wide Band Combining.This parameter specifies the RF transmit mode of the TRX. the cabinet top output power of the BTS cannot be This parameter specifies whether the TRX supports antenna hopping. this parameter specifies the number of the timeslot occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the RSL link on the Abis interface. However. If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions. This parameter is to be viewed only. the number of the port on the interface board that connects the BTS to the BSC. the step of increasing or reducing the power of the TRX is 2 dB. frame number. 2HDLC_HUB. That is. None This parameter specifies the maximum number of Abis timeslots occupied by the PDCHs None on a TRX. Diversity Transmitter. then the MS cannot receive the broadcast control messages from the main BCCH TRX properly.

When configuring RSL links. This parameter need not be set when the Work Mode is set to Auto. The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. None The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. None This parameter specifies whether to select different working voltages for the TRX power None amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes. You must set this parameter when the Work Mode is set to Manual. . None This parameter specifies the unique number of a TRX in the HUB domain in HUB HDLC transmission mode. The in-BTS HDLC channel None connects to the BTS TMU. This parameter specifies the priority of the clock reference source. This parameter specifies the index of an HDLC channel between the PEU and the PTU. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message. This function has the following benefits: 1. None This parameter specifies the allowed power difference between the maximum output power of the QTRU and the maximum nominal output power. the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value of this parameter.This parameter specifies the index of the in-BTS HDLC channel. When the Work Mode is set to Free-run. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell. If this parameter is set to a too small value. None This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GXPUM (processing the RSL signaling) is located. this parameter is This parameter specifies the HDLC channel index of reverse link in an HDLC ring network. set this parameter to the logical slot number of the GXPUM. There are two types of slot number: logical slot number and physical slot number. This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume. the handover success rate may be affected.

The value of this parameter has eight bits. suppose the MS supports multiple sub frequency bands of the 900 MHz frequency band. None The P/N criterion determines whether the observation time of QTRU downlink power is None insufficient. see GSM Rec.08. The BSC assigns channels on the TRXs with priority of R-GSM. This function has the following benefits: 1. The eights bits (from the least significant bit to the most significant bit) specify whether to support the A5/0. PGSM frequency bands if the cell load is greater than this threshold. thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH when receiving an initial access request. None This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is allowed.. the BSC This parameter determines when the channel is assigned on the QTRU: When the channel is assigned on the QTRU board by using the dynamic power sharing algorithm. The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. That is. you must set the parameter based on the balance conditions of the uplink The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed. The number of call drops is not incremented if the call reestablishment is successful or if the subscriber hooks on. you can infer that the BSS supports the corresponding encryption algorithm. the average call drop rate decreases. This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. A5/4. In this case. 05. you must adjust the TRX configuration of the None None If this parameter is set to Yes. and A5/7 encryption algorithms respectively. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage. This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. In directed retry. A5/3. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). the BSC can assign only an SDCCH None when receiving an initial access request. A5/6. If a bit is 0. otherwise. Therefore. For details. this is not The value of this parameter should be added in estimated power when the downlink path loss is estimated by the uplink path loss.08. the required level of received signals is low. If this parameter is set to No. the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resume the call. It is not a primary method of clearing traffic congestion. If this switch is set to Yes.This parameter specifies the encryption algorithm supported on the BSS side. E-GSM. In such a case. None A5/5. If the value of this parameter is too small. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. you can infer This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed. Thus a call may drop. see GSM Rec. This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) function. and when the remaining power of QTRU board is less than the call required None power of cell. None The P/N criterion determines whether the statistics time of QTRU downlink power is insufficient. For details. . On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference This parameter specifies: for the channel assignment. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. 05. many MSs attempt to camp on the cell. None This parameter specifies the downlink signal strength estimated by the QTRU power sharing algorithm together with downlink power control target threshold. A5/2. If a bit is set to 1. A5/1. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. this parameter should be set to No. this is allowed to assign the channel. This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. If this parameter is set to No. If directed retry is preformed frequently in a local network. a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. The BSC ignores the priority of PNone GSM/E-GSM/R-GSM sub frequency bands if the cell load is smaller than and equal to this threshold.

the capacity of the BSC is reduced. of busy TCHF + Num. halfrate channels are assigned. Insufficient halfrate channels can be assigned to the MS. If this parameter is set to a higher value. but the corresponding downlink power control of a cell is None If the uplink received level difference of calls in the same timeslot exceeds the Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels. When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell. If the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is greater than the value of this parameter.5 second. the capacity of the BSC is reduced. None None None When the static Abis resource load is higher than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%) and the dynamic Abis resource load is higher than Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis None Load Thred(%). this parameter can be configured. of busy TCHH/2)/ (Num. This parameter is valid for the concentric The BSC assigns channels in the overlaid subcell to the MS in a concentric cell. TCHH Prior channels are required in None the following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by the MSC. the TCHF or TCCH. the call with the lowest uplink signal strength in the timeslot should be handed over to another timeslot. the situation must be recorded. the half-rate channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very high. this parameter is set to YES. and the percentage of seized TCHs . this operation is not performed during the period specified by this parameter. the half-rate channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very high. HSN is permitted to be used. Dynamic power sharing algorithm. When the total power of the carrier on the single QTRU board exceeds the maximum permissible output power. This parameter specifies the QTRU signal merge algorithm. Otherwise. the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced partially. Insufficient halfrate channels can be assigned to the MS. 2. This parameter specifies when the BSC fails to convert the dynamic PDCH back to the TCH. If this parameter is set to a higher value. If the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is greater than the value of this parameter. the power sharing algorithm needs to be enabled. the BSC monitors the high-level signal and overwhelms the low-level signal per 0. If the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot -the lowest uplink signal strength of None this timeslot > Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels. the full-rate or half-rate channel is preferred according to the dynamic Abis resource load. if this situation lasts N seconds. full-rate channels are assigned. of busy TCHH/2)/ (Num. the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced. In tight frequency resuse. 3. of available TCHF + Num. Otherwise. of available This parameter available TCHH /2) x dynamic TCHF + Num. Thus. This parameter specifies the static Abis resource load threshold. The BSC assigns channels in the overlaid subcell to the MS in a concentric cell. Thus.This parameter specifies the following definitions: 1. halfrate channels are assigned. The None parameter is valid for both built-in PCH and external PCU. Static power sharing algorithm. the call with the lowest uplink signal strength in the timeslot should be handed over to another timeslot. Otherwise. This parameter specifies whether the BSC is allowed to assign the half-rate channels and full-rate channels to the MS according to the channel seizure ratio of the underlaid None subcell and overlaid subcell. the full-rate channel is preferentially assigned. Thus. the AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is set to Yes. of busy TCHF + Num. however. Channel seizure ratio = (Num. of available TCHH /2) x 100%. The channel type to be assigned is decided according to the channel types that are allowed by the MSC and the percentage of seized TCHs in the cell. During None the observation of P seconds. if this situation lasts N seconds. the situation must be recorded. During the observation of P seconds. the situation must be recorded. The difference between static power sharing algorithm and dynamic power sharing If the uplink received level difference of calls in the same timeslot exceeds the Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels. The QTRU power sharing algorithm is disabled. Otherwise. the data in the host and BSC should be simultaneously None multiplied by 10 times to prevent the floating-point values. ofspecifies whether the100%. Channel seizure ratio = (Num. If the data configuration detects that the power sharing must be used. full-rate channels are assigned. This parameter specifies whether to enable Flex MAIO. the half-rate channel is preferred. When the static Abis resource load is lower than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%). When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell. the adjacent-channel interference and co-channel interference among channels occur. Only when the FlexMAIO is set to YES. During the channel assignment. The value is 0-1 in fact. the full-rate channel is preferred. that is.

Principles of taking values are as follows: This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports that are used to determine the signal quality on signaling channels. the impact of sudden changes is reduced. If the downlink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of DL level This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the uplink interference is existed. The greater the value. the TCHF or TCCH. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports that are used to clculate the signal quality on speech/data TCHs. the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists.of CH Record at the interval of the setting value of this parameter to increase the channel priority. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions. The higher the level. If this parameter is set to YES. If this parameter is set to NO. Thus. you need to obtain the average value of signal quality in several successive measurement reports of This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the signal strength on the SDCCH. The greater the value. the lower the quality is. Usually this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high history record This parameter specifies whether the TRX priority is considered during channel assignment. If this parameter is set to a small value. The signal quality on signaling channels should not be determined based on only one measurement result. the greater the signal is. To eliminate the influence of accidental factors. the history record priority is ineffective. the greater the signal strength is. the lower the signal quality is. If this parameter is set to YES. and then This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the speech/data TCH signal strength. the judgment is imprecise. When the Update Period of CH Record expires. the history priority of each channel is reduced by Update Freq. Principles of taking values are as follows: Generally. the lower the quality is. the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. the TRX priority factor is ineffective. the greater the signal is. If this parameter is set to a small value. the AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is set to Yes. TCHH Prior channels are required in the following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by the MSC. The signal quality on TCHs should not be determined based on only one measurement result. None None None If this parameter is set to a higher value. If the uplink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of UL level This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the uplink interference is existed. That is. the channel interference measurement is performed. the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists.This parameter specifies whether the TCH/H is preferentially assigned on the basis of the channel type and current service channel seizure ratio that are allowed by the MSC. the greater the signal strength is. the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. If this parameter is set to a lower value. the influence of accidental factors may be reduced but the judgment of channel status may not be in time. If this parameter is set to a lower value. Usually. the channel interference measurement is not performed None and the interference indication is not sent. the process of updating the history record of channel occupancy is started. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS. If the downlink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of DL level This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the downlink interference is existed. the burst influence may be reduced but the judgment of channel status may not be in time. the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists. To eliminate the influence of accidental factors. If this parameter is None set to NO. During the channel assignment. and the system response is delayed. the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high TRX priority This parameter specifies whether the channel interference is considered in channel assignment. The higher the level. . the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists. If this parameter is set to a great value. If this parameter is set to YES. If this parameter is set to a small value. the TRX priority factor is effective. If this parameter is set None to NO. The higher the level. If this parameter is set to a great value. When this parameter is set to a higher value. the lower the signal quality is. and the percentage of seized TCHs The updating of the history record starts when the Update Period of CH Record times out. The greater the value. If the uplink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of UL level This parameter specifies whether the history record priority is considered in channel assignment. If this parameter is set to a higher value. If this parameter is set to a small value. the network performance is If this parameter is set to a great value. you need to obtain the average value of signal quality in several successive measurement reports of TCHs. The higher the level. the judgment is imprecise. Update Freq of CH Record is subtracted from the history priority of each channel to improve the priority of the channel. If this parameter is set to a great value. the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists. The greater the value. set this parameter to 2. the history record priority is effective. This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the downlink interference is existed.

if the current channel seizure ratio reaches or exceeds this value. Therefore. and highest coding rates in the ACS respectively. the counter descreases by 3. the CIR is 0.5 dB. the CIR is 0. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with little interference. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the SDCCHs of a cell are in idle state. the SDCCHs in the cell may be insufficient and the dynamic adjustment cannot be initiated. This parameter specifies whether to turn on the switch for the tight BCCH algorithm. These types include: Capacity with a higher priority Quality with a higher priority PS coordination with a relatively higher priority This parameter specifies whether the combination of two half-rate TCHs into one fullrate TCH is allowed in a cell. low. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. if RQI equals 2. If this parameter is set too small and consequently there is a large number of requests for SDCCHs. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If the number of SDCCHs exceeds the value of this parameter. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. This parameter specifies the minimum time for the recovery of a TCH from an SDCCH. Yes: Open No: Close This parameter specifies whether the current cell supports the dynamic transmission diversity or dynamic PBT: 0: not supported 1: dynamic transmission diversity supported 2: dynamic PBT supported This parameter sets the priority of different types in channel allocation. otherwise. high. representing the lowest. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. None By default. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the CIR is 1 dB. This parameter specifies one of the conditions for converting the TCHF to the SDCCH. the value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 3. If this parameter is set too large and consequently there is a small number of requests for SDCCHs. Since there are at most four coding rates in the ACS. the counter is set to ResTime. If RQI equals 1. there is an None It is recommended not to use the TIGHT BCCH algorithm in multiband network. the CIR is 1 dB. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. and thus controls whether to enable the BCCH aggressive frequency reuse algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. if RQI equals 2. thus affecting the access of users. Besides this parameter. this field have four values 0. and so forth. None None Huawei recommends that the parameter Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed be set to No. and so forth. the forced handover and call delay caused by timeslot arrangement can be avoided.5 dB. and so forth. If RQI equals 1. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the fullrate TCH is assigned preferentially. the channel allocation If this parameter is set too small. The value of the counter is adjusted every three seconds. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the CIR is 0. and 3.5 dB. If the number of idle SDCCHs in the cell is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. 1. In a normal cell. If the number of idle SDCCHs > 8 + N1. but there may cause some TCHF-only calls to fail because the timeslot arrangement is unavailable. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the forced handover may fail in the concentric cell. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the half-rate TCH is assigned preferentially. the BSC tries to find a TCHF that can be converted to the SDCCH. it cannot correctly indicate the idle state of the current SDCCHs and consequently the rollback of SDCCHs immediately triggers adjustment and affects the network performance. If this parameter is set too large. Each time the TCH is converted to the SDCCH. It is meaningless to set the parameter too large. The processing for the SDCCH recovered to the TCH is as follows: each cell is configured with a counter. the CIR is 1 dB. the other three conditions for initiating the conversion from TCHFs to SDCCHs are as follows: This parameter specifies the coding rate adopted on a half-rate channel when a call is initially established. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. if RQI equals 2. In Huawei II channel assignment algorithm.5 dB. it needs to determine whether the number of SDCCHs after the conversion exceeds the Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum. None None None None . 2. and so forth. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. if the number of idle SDCCHs < 8 + Idle When the BSC determines whether to initiate the conversion from the TCH to the SDCCH. the CIR is 1 dB. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the requests cannot The AMR ACS (F/H) contains at most four coding rates. Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes to ensure that the timeslot arrangement can be performed in the cell. if RQI equals 2. If this parameter is set to No. If RQI equals 1. the CIR is 0. If this parameter is set too small. If RQI equals 1. The values 0 to 3 match those of the coding rates of AMR ACS (F/H). The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. the BSC does not initiate the conversion.This parameter specifies whether the interference priority is considered during channel assignment.

If RQI equals 1. if RQI equals 2. and so forth. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the CIR is 0. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the CIR is 0. the CIR is 1 dB. and so forth. the CIR is 1 dB.5 dB. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. if RQI equals 2. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. 2. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the CIR is 0. If RQI equals 1. and highest coding rates in the ACS respectively. If RQI equals 1. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. None None None None .5 dB. Bit 1 means that the coding rate is contained in the ACS and bit 0 means that the coding rate is not contained in the ACS. and so forth. the CIR is 1 dB. and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. if RQI equals 2. and so forth. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The value of this parameter has five bits. this field have four values 0. and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. if RQI equals 2. If RQI equals 1. if RQI equals 2. the CIR is 1 dB. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.5 dB.5 dB. Use a BIT map to present the speech coding rates contained in the ACS. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the CIR is 1 dB. If RQI equals 1. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the CIR is 0. the CIR is 0. If RQI equals 1. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. the CIR is 0. Otherwise.Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. If RQI equals 1. The five bits represent the coding rates from 7. the CIR is 1 dB. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. if RQI equals 2. the CIR is 1 dB. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report.5 dB. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call.5 dB. the ACS does not include the coding rate.40 kbit/s to 4. the coding rate is included in the ACS. If RQI equals 1. the CIR is 1 dB. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1. low. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. and so forth.5 dB. If RQI equals 1.75 kbit/s (from left to right). The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. there is an This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. if RQI equals 2. if RQI equals 2. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm.5 dB. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. This parameter specifies the coding rate adopted on a full-rate channel when a call is initially established. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. and so forth. the CIR is 1 dB. the CIR is 1 dB. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call.5 dB. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the CIR is 0. the CIR is 1 dB. If a bit is 1. and so forth. the CIR is 0. and so forth. If RQI equals 1. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. and so forth. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the CIR is 1 dB. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The active coding set (ACS) is a set of coding rates currently available for calls. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. there is an None None None None None None None None Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained in the ACS. the CIR is 0. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. Therefore. high.5 dB. The values 0 to 3 match those of the coding rates of AMR ACS (F/H). and 3.5 dB. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. and so forth. Since there are at most four coding rates in the ACS. One to four coding The AMR ACS (F/H) contains at most four coding rates. 1. if RQI equals 2. the CIR is 0. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. the value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 3. if RQI equals 2. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. if RQI equals 2. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. representing the lowest. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. if RQI equals 2. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. the CIR is 0. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. wherein a BIT corresponds to a coding rate. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1. the CIR is 0.5 dB. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.

This parameter determines whether the BSC preferentially assigns a half-rate TCH to an None MS when the Abis resources are insufficient. if RQI equals 2.75 kbit/s (from left to right). if RQI equals 2. the CIR is 1 dB. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. thus improving the response speed of the on the signaling processing rate. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. In specific cells. If RQI equals 1. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. That is. sending point-to-point short messages on the downlink is parameter must be set to No. This parameter specifies whether to enable the Abis resource adjustment TCHH function. the frequency band of the preferentially reassigned channel is different from what is used in the original assignment.5 dB. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If a bit is 1. the CIR is 0. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. this messages. Otherwise.5 dB. there is an This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the CIR is 0. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The eight bits represent the coding rates from 12. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the ACS does not include the coding rate. To improve the success rate of reassignment. the CIR is 0. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. if RQI equals 2. the call completion rate of MSs is increased and the QoS of the network is improved. the CIR is 1 dB.Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS.5 dB. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. One to four coding If this parameter is set to a great value. Bit 1 means that the coding rate is contained in the ACS and bit 0 means that the coding rate is not contained in the ACS. and so forth. If receiving short messages is allowed. the CIR is 1 dB. the CIR is 1 dB. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. The value of this parameter has eight bits. wherein a BIT corresponds to a coding rate. the CIR is 1 dB. the CIR is 1 dB. If RQI equals 1. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. Reassigning radio channels can be performed in the carriers with the same frequency None None None None None None None None Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained in the ACS. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. if RQI equals 2. If RQI equals 1. disabled to ensure sufficient radio channels for calls. In normal assignment procedure. if RQI equals 2. If RQI equals 1. the CIR is 0.2 kbit/s to 4. however. and so forth. If RQI equals 1. Thus the success rate of assignment can be increased. the default value of this parameter is No. the CIR is 0. and so forth.5 dB. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. the BSC does not report the message to the MSC immediately. the CIR is 0. Instead. and so forth. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. and so forth. For terrestrial network. and so forth. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the CIR is 0. and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS.5 dB. this function can be enabled The channel activation and immediate assignment commands are sent at the same time to reduce the impact of the delay in satellite transmission to accelerate the signaling processing rate.5 dB. if RQI equals 2. the BSC preferentially assigns a half-rate TCH to the . the CIR is 0. Pay special attention to the setting of this parameter during This parameter specifies whether to disable the sending of point-to-point short an upgrade. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. If this parameter is set to Yes. after receiving the assignment failure message from the MS on the SDCCH. The active coding set (ACS) is a set of coding rates currently available for calls. the CIR is 1 dB. When this parameter is set to Yes. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. if RQI equals 2. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. it is recommended that the default value Different Band be used. If RQI equals 1. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1. increases the load of the BSC. and so forth. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. This parameter specifies the maximum number of reassignments after the assignment on the Um interface fails.5 dB. transmission. MSs cannot receive short messages. the coding rate is included in the ACS. This. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the BSC re-assigns radio channels and re-originates the assignment on the Um interface. If RQI equals 1.5 dB. In satellite transmission mode. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. Use a BIT map to present the speech coding rates contained in the ACS. the CIR is 1 dB. if RQI equals 2.

the measurement report is valid. The eMLPP supports a maximum of seven priorities (A. 0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a GSM900 cell is valid. For example: If this parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5. When the priority of a GSM900 cell is sequenced on the basis of its frequency band. the TDD cell joins in the cell prioritization. when preemption occurs. the cell joins in the cell priority sequence. The two highest priorities are reserved only for local use in the network. This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a TDD cell. 0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a DCS1800 cell is valid. If the receive level of the 3G cell in the measurement report is greater than the value of this parameter. 05. the MS with the lowest This parameter specifies whether to allow the reassignment function. 0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB This parameter specifies the number of UTRAN TDD cells that should be contained in the None best cell list or in the measurement report.08. After the valid measurement report is filtered. and then converts the result into the RXLEV value. In eMLPP. the 3G cell joins in the cell priority This parameter specifies the signal level offset of an FDD cell. When sequencing the priority of a DCS1800 cell based on its frequency band. and 0-4). the value of this parameter should be added to the receive level in the measurement report. After the valid measurement report is filtered. and directed retry based on the priorities of different calls when network resources are occupied. it adds the value of this parameter to the received signal level. When the priority of a 3G cell is sequenced. the value of this parameter should be added to the receive level in the measurement report. If the receive level of the 1800 MHz cell in the measurement report is greater than the value of this parameter. If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is 10 dBm. After the measurement report is filtered. see GSM Rec. 0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB This parameter specifies the level threshold for cell reselection in connection mode. This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a GSM900 cell. If the eMLPP function needs to be fully implemented. Priorities 0-4 are used for subscribers all over the world. After the measurement report is filtered. the This parameter indicates that when the MS reports the EMR. In connection mode. For details. if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0. A TDD cell can become a candidate cell only when the average receive level of the TDD cell is greater than the TDD Cell Reselect Diversity of the serving cell. the measurement report is valid. preemption. the network can use different policies such as queuing. the MS starts to search for 3G cells. 7] or above [8. This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a TDD cell is valid. B. The measurement report is valid if the receive level of the TDD cell in the measurement None report is greater than the value of this parameter. This helps to improve the call completion rate and the QoS of the network. and then sequence the TDD cells. the If this parameter is set to Yes.This parameter specifies whether to allow the enhanced multi-level precedence and preemption (eMLPP) function. the BSC None None None None None None None None None . the measurement report is valid. the cell joins in the cell priority rank. When the receive level of the GSM900 cell in the measurement report is greater than the value of this parameter. 0: -∞ (always select a cell if acceptable) 1: -28 dB 2: -24 dB This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about an FDD cell is valid. level values 0-63 map with -100 dBm to -37 dBm. If there are a large number of assignment failure messages. Add the value of this parameter to the receive level of the TDD cell in the measurement None report. it is recommended that the value of this parameter be added to the receive level of the 3G cell in the measurement report. 15]. This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a DCS1800 cell. the BSC initiates a reassignment when receiving an assignment failure message from the Um interface. If the Allow EMLPP is set to Yes.

In packet transfer mode. None In a multiple band network.08. measurement results of six neighbor cells known and permitted by the NCC at the bands with the best signal The early classmark sending control (ECSC) specifies whether the MSs in a cell use early For a 900/1800 MHz CoBCCH cell. In idle mode. see GSM Rec. 0: -20 dB 1: -6 dB This parameter specifies the number of UTRAN FDD cells that should be contained in the None best cell list or in the measurement report. the If the system information indicates "MBR". the 3G cell can be one None candidate cell for cell reselection. it is recommended that classmark sending. the MS sends additional classmark information to the network as early as For a 1800 MHz cell in the dual-band network.08. In the inter-band handover. For example: This parameter specifies one threshold of the signal level for 3G cell reselection. a maximum of the value of Serving Band Reporting can be reported. RSCP. None 0: -∞ (always select a cell if acceptable) 1: -28 dB 2: -24 dB This parameter specifies the threshold of the signal level for cell reselection in connection mode before Qsearch C is obtained.After a successful immediate this parameter be set to Yes. This parameter is used for the MS to report neighbor cell explanation of multiple bands. 7] or above [8. For details. if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0. it is . These neighbor cells must meet the following requirements: When Power Deviation Indication is set to Yes. 15].This parameter specifies whether the EMR can contain the information about a cell with None an invalid BSIC. see GSM Rec. this parameter can be set on the basis of the traffic volume on each frequency band. This parameter specifies the measurement report counter of an FDD cell. band of multi-band MSs. the MS None starts to search for 3G cells. power class must be correctly If the A5/4-7 encryption algorithm is used. the transmit power of an MS is the MS maximum transmit power level plus the power calculated from the power deviation if None the class 3 MS on the DCS1800 band does not receive the original power command after random access. Serving Band Reporting is valid if Report Type is set to EMR. Received Signal Code Power Only when the average receive level of a 3G cell is FDD Q Offset greater than that of the serving cell. assignment. if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0. This parameter indicates whether the power deviation is added to the class 3 MS on the DCS1800 band on the basis of the maximum MS transmit power. Only when the receive level of a 3G cell is greater than FDD Qmin. This parameter specifies whether the MS is allowed to search for a 3G cell when the BSIC must be decoded. For example: If this parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5. None This parameter specifies one threshold of the signal level for cell reselection in packet transfer mode. None 15]. the 3G cell becomes a candidate cell. 04. If this parameter is set to 0. The CM3 (classmark 3) information contains the power information of each recommended that this parameter be set to Yes. None This parameter specifies the level threshold for cell reselection in idle mode. When the MS reports the number of neighbor cells on the same frequency band with the serving cell. 05. the MS reports the number of neighbor cells on different frequency bands. Ec/No means Signal Noise Ratio in WCDMA. 7] or above [8. It maps with C/I in GSM. it is possible. the MS reports the It is sent in the system information 2ter and 5ter. The MS does not receive the original power command after random access. For details. the MS starts to search for 3G cells.

the immediate assignment message is dispatched and retransmitted. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. see GSM Rec. This parameter should be set as required: In the areas where the traffic volume is low. the BTS should resend the I frame. If the MS detects errors in an I frame. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter. When this number is reached. If this parameter is set to a too small value. Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. thus preventing some MSs from accessing the network. For details of this parameter. Each time an SACCH message is not decoded. the put-through rate of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase. If the MS detects errors in an I frame. the immediate assignment retransmission parameter is not sent. For example. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter. If the MS detects errors in an I frame. the counter S decreases by 1. the function is not obvious. the put-through rate of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase. a long time lasts before an MS disconnects a call. the counter S is enabled and the initial value is set to this parameter value.08. This parameter is used for load control. it is recommended this parameter If this parameter is set to a too great value. the put-through rate of MS None This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the immediate assignment retransmission parameter to the BTS. It is recommended that this parameter be not used. None None None None None . It is recommended that this parameter be not used. 000001 indicates that users of all classes except class 10 are allowed to access the network. If the MS detects errors in an I frame. If the parameter is set to No. the BTS should resend the I frame.If the MS does not receive Immediate Assignment messages or This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions of the immediate assignment message. congestion may occur This parameter specifies whether to allow the MSs of common access classes to access the network. In the cell where the traffic volume is heavy. If this parameter is set to a too small value. Each time This parameter specifies whether to allow emergency calls. Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. Value 1 indicates that access is not allowed. see the descriptions of the Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. This parameter specifies the maximum number of Channel Request messages that can be sent by an MS in an immediate assignment procedure. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. If the MS detects errors in an I frame. the BTS should resend the I frame. If this parameter is set to a too great value. Value 0 indicates that access is allowed. None This parameter can be used to control network load based on the MS access classes. see the descriptions of the Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a halfrate channel).For example. If this parameter is set to Yes. it always listens to the messages on the BCCH and all the common control channels (CCCHs) in the CCCH group to which the MS belongs. and therefore resource usage is low. If the MS detects errors in an I frame. the BTS should resend the I frame. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter. Within the period specified by this parameter. see the descriptions of the Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. For MSs whose access class is from 0 to 9. this parameter can be set to 4 or 7 to improve the success rate of MS access. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter. radio links are likely to be faulty and therefore call drops occur. 0000000001 indicates that the MSs of all classes except class 0 are allowed to access the network. the BTS should resend the I frame. Value 0 indicates that access is allowed. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I during the multiframe release. After the MS initiates the immediate assignment procedure. If this parameter is set to a small value. In the cells where congestion occurs or in the micro cells where the traffic volume is high. the immediate assignment message is not retransmitted even if the Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit (ms) is not exceeded.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SACCH. the immediate assignment retransmission parameter is sent. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter. if this parameter is set to No. Once a dedicated channel is assigned to the MS.This parameter indicates the maximum number of retransmissions of the I frame. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter. This parameter takes effect on the downlink. emergency calls are not allowed only when the access control bit is set to 0 and Emergent Call Disable is set to Yes. thus preventing some MSs from accessing the network. This parameter can be used to control network load based on the MS access classes.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SDCCH. For MSs whose access class is from 11 to 15.This parameter specifies when an MS disconnects a call if the MS unsuccessfully decodes the SACCH message. 0408 and 05. If the parameter is set to Yes. Otherwise. the BTS should resend the I frame. This parameter specifies whether to allow the MSs of special access classes to access the network. Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If this parameter is set to a great value.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a fullrate channel). This parameter is used for load control. the message is not dispatched or retransmitted. the function is not obvious. emergency calls are allowed. Value 1 indicates that access is not allowed.

the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer T200 is set to a too small value. full-rate version 3. For details of the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter. the speech quality is improved. But the error report rate is high. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer T200 is set to a too small value. the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer T200 is set to a too small value. the BSC If timer T200 is set to a too small value. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH on the SDCCH. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 when the SDCCH supports SAPI3 services. the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER). the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer T200 is set to a too small value. the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the FACCH/TCHH over the Um interface. the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. Access Level. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.0529 or later and the double-transceiver BTSs. BCCH aiding: The main BCCH is aided to another normal TRX in this cell. the BTS considers that an This parameter specifies the correlation between training sequences. the system determines whether the received signal is the random access signal of an MS through the correlation between training sequences (41 bits) and calculates the TA value. half-rate version 1. SAPI0 maps with speech services.Access Level. Allowed & Recover Immediately: The TRX aiding is enabled but the switchback is This parameter specifies the speech version supported by the BSC. the error report rate of the MS is low but the MS cannot easily access the This parameter specifies whether to enable the TRX aiding function. If the receive level of the RACH burst is greater than the value of RACH Min. and SAPI3 maps with short message services. the number of data retransmissions is reduced Generally. For details of the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter. For supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the FACCH/TCHF over the Um interface. see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)). see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. the AMR coding This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under full-rate AMR calls. see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).1130 or later and the double-transceiver BTSs support the LAPDm N200 parameter.This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the LAPDm N200 parameter to the BTS. If details. SAPI0 maps with speech services. the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer T200 is set to a too small value. the AMR function is enabled. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. If timer N200 is set to a too small value. The value of AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH Only the BTS3X in G3BTS32. If this parameter is set to a too great value. this parameter is set to 1. If timer N200 is set to a too small value. The value of this parameter has six bits. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. and SAPI3 maps with short message services. If timer N200 is set to a too small value. BCCH aiding switchback: BCCH aiding switchback functions . If details. the AMR coding This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under half-rate AMR calls. the speech quality is improved. the BTS regards this access as an invalid one and no decoding is performed. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the Um interface when the TCH supports SAPI0 services. If timer N200 is set to a too small value. If timer N200 is set to a too small value. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the Um interface when the TCH supports SAPI3 services. The data link layer transforms the physical link that is vulnerable to errors into a sequential non-error data link. the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. This parameter specifies the following rules for TRX aiding function control: TRX Aiding Not Allowed: The TRX aiding function is disabled. If this parameter is set to Yes. full-rate The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. If this parameter is set to No. the BSC sends the LAPDm N200 parameter. If timer N200 is set to a too small value. If timer N200 is set to a too small value. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER). None The six bits (from the most significant bit to the least significant bit) indicate the following speech versions respectively: half-rate version 3. For supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. Allowed & Recover Forbidden: The TRX aiding is allowed but the switchback is forbidden after the faulty TRX is restored. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter. If this parameter is set to a too small value.30000. half-rate version 2. RACH Busy Threshold must be greater than RACH Min. According the GSM protocols.Access Level. The value of AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter. The entities at the two ends of this data link use the acknowledgement For the BTS3X in 03. It is set according to the actual BTS receiver sensitivity and the minimum MS access level. If the receive level of the RACH burst is smaller than the value of RACH Min. the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer T200 is set to a too small value. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SDCCH over the Um interface.04. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter. this parameter specifies the level threshold for the random access of the MS. T200 prevents the data link layer from deadlock during data transmission. the AMR function is enabled. the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. the allowable error for the random access signal is high and an MS can easily access the network.

An MS can be handed over only when Max Resend Times of Phy Info multiplied by Radio Link Timeout This parameter can be set to Yes when 2G/3G network is applied. The greater the value of this parameter is set. this parameter specifies the level threshold for the MS random access when the BTS determines the RACH busy state. the AMR coding This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under half-rate AMR calls. the counter decreases by 1. the BTS needs to retransmit the physical information to the MS when the timer T3105 expires for the first time. . only the cells whose loads are smaller the handover does not make sense. The physical information is sent over the FACCH. The BSC does not support the mechanism for For the BTS3X series and double-transceiver BTSs. heavy loads are selected as candidate target cells so that When target cells are selected during direct retry.The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. the This parameter specifies the length of timer T3150. No: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is forbidden. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. Otherwise. the speech quality is improved. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. Under the same frame erasion rate (FER). a TDD 3G better cell handover is triggered. see the description of SACCH multi-frames. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. BTS resends physical information to MS and restarts the timer T3105. After receiving the message. supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. 08. If the number of retransmissions exceeds Ny1 before the BTS receives any correct SAMB frame from the MS. If the BTS successfully decodes the SACCH measurement report. The value of AFR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH If the value of the parameter is too high. a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the RSCP of an adjacent 3G cell is greater than the TDD RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time.If the The value of this parameter can be increased when handover becomes slow or the handover success rate decreases because of clock problems or poor transmission.If the timer T3105 expires before BTS receives the SAMB frame from MS. the Paging Times is set to 4 in the MSC. the BSC releases the newly assigned dedicated channel and stops This parameter specifies whether the 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed. When Assignment Cell Load Judge Enabled is set to Yes. For the BTS2X series (excluding the BTS24). the AMR function is enabled. This parameter specifies the total number of paging times. see GSM Rec. For the BTS3X series and the double-transceiver BTSs. At present. The This parameter is used by the BTS to inform the BSC of radio link connection failure. Yes: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed. The greater the value of this parameter. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER). If the Inter-RAT HO Preference parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold. this parameter must be set according to the actual receiver sensitivity of the BTS and the minimum access level of the MS to ensure the balance between the uplink and the downlink. cells. The total paging times is approximately equal to this parameter multiplied by the paging times configured on the MSC side. if the triggering conditions of TDD 3G better cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. an alarm is generated. the more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered. The greater the value of this parameter is set. the AMR coding This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under full-rate AMR calls. a TDD 3G better cell handover is triggered. If For details. the more difficult the TDD 3G better cell handover can be triggered. the BTS considers that the timeslot is busy. Each time the BTS fails to decode the SACCH measurement report sent by the MS. this parameter only indicates whether the timeslot is busy. The value of AHR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities.58 and 04. the counter for determining whether a radio link is faulty is set to the value of this parameter. congestion may occur. According to the P/N criterion. the BTS starts the timer T3105. If the value of T3105 is smaller than or equal to 18 ms. When the BTS sends physical information to the MS. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). When the BTS receives the SACCH measurement report from the MS. If both the Inter-System Handover Enable and the Better 3G Cell HO Allowed parameters are set to Yes. the 2G cell handover is preferred. the AMR function is enabled.08. The load of the cell is greater than or equal to Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold. Four TDMA frames are sent each time at the interval of 18 ms. if the triggering conditions of TDD 3G better cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. the cells with This parameter is used to adjust candidate target cells for directed retry. the speech quality is improved. For details. the more difficult the TDD 3G better cell handover can be triggered. If the value of the than or equal to the Directed Retry Load Access Threshold are selected as candidate parameter is too low. the directed try procedure is started if the following two conditions are met: The cell supports directed try. When the receive level of the random access burst timeslot is greater than this threshold. the more difficult for the BSC to hand over the MS to a 2G cell and the easier for the BSC to hand over the MS to a TDD 3G cell. the 3G cell handover is preferred. The maximum times for This parameter specifies the maximum number of Physical information retransmissions. According to the P/N criterion. the BTS sends the BSC a connection failure message. If For details. Assume that the maximum number is Ny1. see the description of SACCH multi-frames. The parameter and the paging times configured on the MSC side together determine the number of retransmissions of the paging message. and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than or equal to the HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell. If this parameter is set to a too great value. The greater the value of this parameter is set. which can also be a handover failure message. it is difficult to select candidate target target cells. This parameter also affects handover access of RACH BURST If the value of this parameter does not match with the value supported by the BTS. None Properly setting this parameter can increase the paging success rate.

a fast handover is triggered. The level values 0 to 127 map with -64 dB to 63 dB. thus leading to This parameter specifies the duration of penalty that is performed on the original ping-pong handovers. This helps to parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to a too great value. This helps to parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter 3G cell. This parameter specifies the allowed number of invalid measurement reports when the BSC uses the measurement reports for filtering. the corresponding handover decision is triggered. inaccurate. the filtered This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for filtering after the value is more accurate. if the compensated downlink level of the serving cell is smaller than the value of this parameter. the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. If this parameter is set to a small value. inaccurate. The fast handover must comply with the P/N criterion. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. During a measurement period. if the MS moves at a speed greater than the value of this None parameter.During a handover decision. The fast handover must comply with the P/N criterion. that is. the filtered value is avoid improper handover decision based on a single inaccurate measurement report. the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell. if the triggering conditions difficult the fast-moving handover can be triggered. That is. The greater the value of this parameter is set. If this BSC receives the measurement reports of the serving cell from the BTS. a fast handover occurs only if the difference of path loss between a chain neighbor cell and the serving cell is greater than or equal to the value None of this parameter. no filtering is performed handover. but the time delay is longer. the BSC first selects the target This parameter specifies whether an MS is preferentially handed over to a 2G cell or to a handover cell from the 2G candidate cells. the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell. the filtered This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for filtering after the value is more accurate. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the BSC first selects the target handover cell from the 3G candidate cells. the more This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. None . the triggering conditions of fast handover must be met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. serving cell after a successful fast handover. None None During the UL subcell to the OL subcell handover in the enhanced dualband network. the triggering conditions of fast handover must be met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. and no fast handover decision is made. the more This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. If this During a measurement period. If the number of received measurement This parameter can only be applied to the fast-moving reports is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter. According to the P/N criterion. a load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell cannot be triggered. if the filtered uplink level of the serving cell is smaller than the value of this parameter. the triggering conditions of fast handover are met. a fast handover is triggered. During a measurement period. is set to Preference for 3G Cell. If this parameter is set to a small value. Such a period is within the value defined by this parameter. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. the traffic load the traffic load in the OL subcell is higher than the Inner Cell Serious Overload Threshold. If this parameter is set to a too great value. if the triggering conditions of enhanced dualband handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. if this parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell. the period during which difficult the fast-moving handover can be triggered. The greater the value of this parameter is set. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. a fast handover is triggered. in the UL subcell is increased. a fast handover is triggered. During a measurement period. of fast handover is met for a period longer than or equal to the value of this parameter. if If this parameter is set to a too small value. That is. That is. If this BSC receives the measurement reports of the adjacent cell from the BTS. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. but the time delay is longer. the filtered value is avoid improper handover decision based on a single inaccurate measurement report. thus leading to This parameter specifies the penalty that is performed on the downlink level of the ping-pong handovers. original serving cell after a successful fast handover.

Distance Hysterisis Between Boudaries of This parameter is a relative value. Thus. If the flow control level in the current system is greater than the value of this parameter. Suppose the signal strength of serving cell is SS(s) and the signal strength of the adjacent cell is SS(n). This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. the larger the blank zone is. The greater the value of this parameter is set. If this parameter is set to a too great or too low value. all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Subcell Lower Load Threshold. The decision condition for a handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is as follows: SS(s) . This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. the more difficult the handover between the OL subcell and the UL subcell can be triggered. thus speeding up the load handover.According to the P/N criterion. If this parameter is set to a too small value. no handover can be triggered within the period defined by this parameter. all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. The greater the value of this parameter is. the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased. Thus. the system flow value of this parameter per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO load is increased. None If the traffic load of the UL subcell is higher than the UL subcell serious overload threshold. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. the system flow In Enhanced dualband If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is lower than the UL load is increased. None None This parameter specifies the level step of the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter. this parameter should be decided before the handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. .SS(n) < Distance between Boundaries of UL And OL Subcells . the more difficult the handover between the OL subcell and the UL subcell can be triggered. if the triggering conditions of enhanced dualband handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. adversely affected. period. load the handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell due to low or high UL subcell balancing between the OL subcell and UL subcell is load is not allowed. the system flow load is increased. the handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the If this parameter is set to a too great value. If this parameter is set to a too small value. For the enhanced dualband handover algorithm. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the UL subcell general overload threshold. congestion may occur in the target To prevent ping-pong handovers. After a handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell is successful. the boundaries of the OL and UL subcells are determined according to the relative value between the signal strength of None If this parameter is set to a too small value. The greater the value of this parameter is set. the corresponding handover decision is triggered. which specifies the size of blank zone between the UL subcell and the OL subcell. congestion may This parameter specifies whether the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is enabled. the system flow load is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the value of Step length of UL subcell load HO(dB) per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO period. the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased. This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell.

This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is higher than the UL subcell general overload threshold. the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased. a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the Ec/No of an adjacent 3G cell is greater than Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time. and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than or equal to the HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell. The level values 0 to 49 map to -24 dB to 0 dB. the MS that sends the channel request message in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the UL subcell. a 3G better cell handover is triggered. difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered. some calls of the OL subcell is handed over to the UL subcell. the more difficult for the BSC to hand over the MS to a 2G cell and the easier for the BSC to hand over the MS to an FDD 3G cell. the MS access to the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to the OL subcell. a 3G better cell handover is triggered. In an enhanced dualband cell. If the Inter-RAT HO Preference parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold. None . the 3G cell handover is preferred. some calls of the UL subcell is handed over to the OL subcell. Otherwise. the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell. the BSC This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from the UL subcell None to the OL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric algorithm. This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR HR voice service. the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased. Moreover. This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from the OL subcell None to the UL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric algorithm. the more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered. Moreover. the more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered. If this parameter is set to a too small value. corresponding to RQ (receive quality level 0-7) x 10. cells. the more met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is lower than the UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold. The greater the value of this parameter is. During the handover decision: If this parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell. None None If this parameter is set to a too great value. If both Inter-System Handover Enable and Better 3G Cell HO Allowed are set to Yes. This parameter must be set to Yes when 2G/3G network is applied. the BSC This parameter specifies whether an MS is preferentially handed over to a 2G cell or to a first selects the target handover cell from the 2G candidate 3G cell. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. It is used in concentric cell handover decision. if the triggering conditions of 3G better cell handover are The greater the value of this parameter is set. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. the more met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. The greater the value of this parameter is set. According to the P/N criterion. If this parameter is set to a too great value. The greater the value of this parameter is set.If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter. a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the RSCP of an adjacent 3G cell is greater than RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time. if the triggering conditions of 3G better cell handover are The greater the value of this parameter is set. the MS access to the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the UL subcell. According to the P/N criterion. This parameter specifies whether the channel request in the OL subcell is preferentially processed over the channel request the UL subcell according to the UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 70. the MS that sends the channel request message in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to the OL subcell. the 2G cell handover is preferred. Yes: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). This parameter specifies whether the access request in the UL subcell is preferentially processed over the access request in OL subcell according to the UL subcell general overload threshold. the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased. No: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is forbidden. If both Inter-System Handover Enable and Better 3G Cell HO Allowed are set to Yes. If this parameter is set to Preference for 3G Cell. This parameter specifies whether the 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell. if TCH seizure ratio of the UL subcell is smaller than the value of this parameter.

If handover penalty is enabled. This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes. handover penalty is not performed on the OL subcell to the UL subcell handover. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes. and TA Hysteresis. the UL subcell to OL subcell handover is allowed. the calls with higher receive level can be handed over to the OL subcell first. the call can still be handed over to the subcell to OL subcell handover is prohibited during the Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail. RX_QUAL Threshold. corresponding to RQ (receive quality level 0-7) x 10. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 70. If the number reaches the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail. in the UL subcell is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If the call is in the OL subcell and if the OL to UL HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes. Otherwise. TA Threshold. the call cannot be handed over from the UL subcell to the OL subcell during the Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail. That is. the hierarchy handover algorithm is adopted to hand over the calls with higher RX level from the UL subcell to OL subcell. some calls in the OL subcell are handed over to the UL subcell. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the traffic load If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is smaller than the value of this parameter. When deciding whether a call can be handed over from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. When this parameter is set to Yes. the calls in the cell are handed over to the target cell by level. This parameter must be set to a value that is greater than or equal to the En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold. Thus. thus speeding up the load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. OtoU HO Received Level Threshold. previous target cell after the penalty time. When multiple requests for the UL-to-OL handover are sent simultaneously. the UL imposed. the calls are hierarchically handled from level 63 to 0. It is used in concentric cell handover decision. all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased. the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased. and the OL subcell cannot share the traffic. no the BSC determines whether the number of handover failures reaches the MaxRetry penalty related to retry times after UtoO handover failure is Time after UtoO Fail. it cannot be handed over back to the OL subcell during Penalty Time of UtoO HO to avoid ping-pong handovers. This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. the load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the value of Modified step length of UL load HO period per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO period. the traffic load in the UL subcell is heavy. None This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes. the traffic load in the UL subcell is heavy. The value of this parameter is the time This parameter determines whether the traffic load in the UL subcell determines the UL subcell to OL subcell handover or the OL subcell to UL subcell handover in an enhanced concentric cell. None This parameter is valid in an enhanced concentric cell. After an OL subcell to UL subcell handover fails. when a call is handed over from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is higher than the En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold. This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes.This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR FR voice service. During the handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. the This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell of an enhanced concentric cell. Through the hierarchical load handover algorithm. The handover strip is decreased by Underlay HO Step Level every Underlay HO Step Period. Therefore. If this parameter is set to a too great value. When the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail is set to 0. After a UL subcell to OL subcell handover fails. and the OL subcell cannot share the traffic. some calls in the UL subcell are handed over to the OL subcell. . congestion may occur in the target cell and call drops may be caused. Therefore. calls with lower level may be handed over first. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter. This does not conform to the principle that the call of the best quality should be handed over preferentially. the call cannot be handed over from the None OL subcell to the UL subcell during the Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to 0. the traffic load If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter. None If this parameter is set to a too great value. in the OL subcell is increased. the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by UtoO HO Received Level Threshold.

Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell. RX_LEV Hysteresis. RX_LEV Threshold. the BSC determines which service layer should be preferentially selected. TA Threshold. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes. the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold. RX_QUAL Threshold. If TA Pref. RX_QUAL Threshold = RQ (ranging from level 0 to level 7) x 10. the current receive level on the SDCCH can be estimated (by interpolating and filtering) based on the uplink measurement value in the measurement reports sent on the SDCCH. if the triggering conditions of concentric cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. Underlaid Subcell: A channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned. is set to 0. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No. No Preference: A channel is assigned according to general channel assignment In a concentric cell. inter-BSC handovers are triggered at the edge of two adjacent cells. #N/A One of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is determined by different factors. if the triggering conditions of concentric cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed This parameter is valid in an enhanced concentric cell. and TA Hysteresis. the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by TA Hysteresis. Then. UtoO HO Received Level Threshold. If TA Pref. the more difficult the concentric cell handover can be triggered. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is determined by different factors. RX_QUAL Threshold. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to Yes and the access_delay in the channel If the Assign Optimum Layer parameter is set to System Optimization. the BSC determines whether a TCH in the UL subcell or in the OL subcell should be assigned based on the result of comparing the uplink receive level on the SDCCH and In a concentric cell. an intra-BSC incoming cell handover request can be processed in one of the following modes: System Optimization: The measurement level on the BCCH of the target cell is added to the intra-BSC inter-cell handover request messages. The greater the value of this parameter is set. Underlaid Subcell: The TCH in the UL subcell are preferentially assigned to an MS. In a concentric cell. the current receive level on the SDCCH can be estimated (by interpolating and filtering) based on the uplink measurement value in the measurement reports sent on the SDCCH. and TA Hysteresis. For the network with a single frequency band. Then. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. Therefore. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to No. the more difficult the concentric cell handover can be triggered. Then. According to the P/N criterion. 900/1800 MHz cells). incoming BSC handovers occur None None None When TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. Overlaid Subcell: The TCH in the OL subcell are preferentially assigned to an MS. a channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment. In this case. This parameter specifies whether a channel is assigned based on the access_delay in the channel request message during an immediate assignment. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No. the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold. a channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment. . TA Threshold. the TCH in the OL subcell cannot be assigned preferentially to the MS because no TA is lower than this threshold. #N/A None Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell. the BSC determines whether a TCH in the UL subcell or in the OL subcell should be assigned based on the result of comparing the receive level on the SDCCH and AssignIf the Assign Optimum Layer parameter is set to System Optimization. a concentric cell handover is triggered. None None The greater the value of this parameter is set. TA Threshold. According to the P/N criterion. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to Yes and the access_delay in the channel request message is lower than TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref. For a dual-band network (for example. This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell. the BSC compares the measurement value with RX_LEV Threshold. Assign Optimum Layer is set to Underlaid Subcell. and TA Hysteresis. the TCH can be assigned in the following modes: System Optimization: Based on the measurement reports sent on the SDCCH.This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell of an enhanced concentric cell. If TA Pref. When the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No. RX_LEV Hysteresis. RX_QUAL Threshold. and determines the preferred service layer. the channel assignment for an incoming-BSC handover can be processed in one of the following modes: Overlaid Subcell: A channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned. a channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned. and TA Threshold. the recommended value of this parameter is Underlaid Subcell. Otherwise. a concentric cell handover is triggered. RX_LEV Hysteresis.. the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by OtoU HO Received Level Threshold. RX_QUAL Threshold.

The two intra-cell handovers that occur during the period specified by this parameter are regarded as consecutive handovers. call drop may easily occur. None Subtract K Bias from the actual downlink receive level of the candidate cells before ranking their downlink receive level based on the K principle. you are advised to subtract K Bias from the actual downlink receive level of the candidate cells before ranking their downlink receive level based on the K principle. Only when the MS is located at the Umbrella layer and the adjacent cells are located at the Macro. This parameter is valid within only the Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO.This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell. To trigger an intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed UO Signal Intensity Difference = UO Amplifier Power Difference + Combiner Insertion Loss Difference + Path Loss Difference of Different Antennas + Pass Loss Difference of Different Frequencies. This parameter specifies the K offset used in K ranking. None This parameter specifies whether the handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is enabled. penalty is performed. the BSC performs penalty on the adjacent cells of the cell where the MS is located. and avoiding This parameter specifies the period in which penalty is performed on the adjacent cells of the cell where a fast-moving MS is located. This parameter specifies the penalty value. This parameter specifies the signal quality threshold of the TIGHT BCCH handover. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is determined by different factors. Measure the receive level of the UL subcell and OL subcell at several different places if the UL subcell and OL subcell use different antennas. Generally. This parameter is used for the MS Power Prediction after HO. The adjacent cells must be located at the Macro. RX_QUAL Threshold. Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell. Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell. None This parameter specifies the load threshold of the TIGHT BCCH handover. Micro. or None Pico layer. The recommended number of This parameter specifies whether the TA is used as a decisive condition for the concentric cell handover. This parameter affects the ranking of candidate cells. TA Threshold. To reduce the ping-pong effect in an handover. or Pico layer other than the Umbrella layer. increasing the transmit power of the MS. and TA Hysteresis. This parameter should be consistent with the UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold in Huawei II power control algorithm. determines the frequency of intra-cell handovers. To trigger an intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover from a TCH to a BCCH. thus ensuring a relatively high uplink receive level on the new channel after handover. None This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive level is used as a decisive condition for the concentric cell handover. This parameter specifies the expected uplink receive level on a new channel after an MS is handed over to a new cell. This parameter. . the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold. Penalty can be performed on only the cell that is not located at the fourth layer. the downlink receive quality should be lower than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO. When the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No. RX_LEV Hysteresis. together with Forbidden time after MAX Times. Micro. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is determined by different factors. None This parameter specifies whether the handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is enabled. the load of the non-BCCH frequencies should be higher None than the Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO. None This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive quality is used as a decisive condition for the concentric cell handover. If an MS is moving fast. If this parameter is set to a too small value. it is set to 0.

the MS is regarded as moving slow. if the MS fast passes N cells among the P micro cells. When the cell radius is fixed. The setting of this parameter determines the maximum Only when the receive level of the serving cell is within the range of (Edge HO DL RX_LEV width of the handover strip during load handover. This parameter the fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. if this In hierarchical load handover. if the MS fast passes N cells among the P micro cells. When Load HO Allowed is set to Yes. The system flux level is the current flux control level of the system. if this parameter is set to a too great value. Where.When the number of consecutive intra-cell handovers reaches the maximum allowed. the cell can receive the MSs handed over from other cells. When the load of the cell is equal to or greater than the Load HO Threshold. the load handover is triggered when the ratio of TCHs occupied in a cell reaches the threshold defined for load handover. the intra-cell handover may not be timely. If the interval of two continuous intra-cell handovers is shorter than a specified threshold. The traffic load of a cell refers to the TCH seizure rate in the cell. the MS is regarded as moving fast. 0-11: There are 12 flow control levels. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. greater than the value of this parameter. the two handovers are regarded as consecutive handovers. the The more the micro cells are configured. An The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is handover of AMR HR calls. Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO Bandwidth). the greater than the value of this parameter. the number of load handovers increases. Threshold. If it is set to a too small value. An The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS handover of AMR HR calls. the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. The setting of this parameter is dependent on the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold parameter. the intra-cell handover is forbidden for a period. uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. a This parameter to used to disable the intra-cell handover timer is started to forbid the intra-cell handover. According to the P/N criterion. If it is set to a too small value. the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. If it is set to a too small value. all the calls served by the cell may send handover requests simultaneously. The The setting of this parameter affects the width of the handovers are performed as such until all the calls whose receive levels are within the handover strip during load handover. CPU load. If it is set to a too greater value. is greater than the value of this parameter. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. Otherwise. An The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is handover of AMR FR calls. triggered. call drops may occur due to traffic time. and FID queuing load. The more the micro cells are configured. the system traffic volume cannot be reduced effectively. If multiple consecutive intra-cell handovers occur. 0 indicates the lowest level and 11 indicates the highest level. the handover strip increases by one Load HO Step Level for every Load HO Step Period. The setting of this parameter affects the load handover targeted to the cell. . This parameter determines the maximum number of consecutive intra-cell handovers allowed. Load HO Threshold should be set to 85. Therefore. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. the hierarchical handover algorithm for load handover each level is long. The threshold equals 2r/v. a load handover is allowed. The value of this parameter should not be set too high. is used for the BSC to control the number of users to be handed over by levels. System flux thresholds correspond to the system flux obtained based on message packets. Otherwise. Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO Bandwidth) are handed off the current serving cell. Intra-cell handovers are allowed only when the timer expires. the load on the system is increased. This parameter triggered. the cell rejects the MSs handed over from other cells. If it is set to a lower value. the number of handover requests that are rejected increases. corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. In other words. range of (Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold. If this parameter is set to a too great value. If it is set to a lower value. the more difficult According to the P/N criterion. starting from the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold. the more difficult BSC starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover. In some cases. the system resources may be wasted when intra-cell handovers occur frequently. The time threshold is calculated based on the cell radius (r) and the velocity (v). for a certain period. The load handover is triggered when the traffic load in a cell is greater than the value of this parameter. the the fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be BSC starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover. If the cell load is smaller than the value of this parameter. the smaller the value of this parameter is (the required velocity is higher). and the load on the CPU The setting of this parameter affects the load handover will increase rapidly as a consequence. the handover time of congestion in the cell. The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of the load handover. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the more the difficult fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be triggered. Load handover is allowed only when the system flow is lower than the setting of this parameter. If the time taken by an MS to pass a cell is smaller than this threshold. Otherwise.

The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the is greater than the value of this parameter. downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. This parameter specifies the quality level offset of the interface handover of the AMR FR service relative to non-AMR services or the AMR HR service (x 10). When determining whether an interference handover should be triggered, the system compares the receive quality of the MS minus the RXLEVOff with the handover threshold. For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with RXQUALn, is used in interference If the receive level of the serving cell is greater than or equal to 63, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with RXQUALn, is used in interference handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a small value. This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 59 to 62, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 56 to 58, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 53 to 55, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 49 to 52, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 46 to 48, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 42 to 45, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 39 to 41, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 36 to 38, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 32 to 35, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is 31, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is smaller than or equal to 30, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.

If the number of consecutive measurement reports without If the number of consecutive measurement reports without the downlink measurement the downlink measurement report is greater than the value report is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter, the handover decision of this parameter, the handover decision related to no related to no downlink measurement report is allowed. downlink measurement report is not performed. Therefore, if this parameter is set to a lower value, the no downlink If the downlink MRs are not included in the MRs received, and if the uplink receive The handover decision is allowed only when the uplink quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, a no downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of this measurement report emergency handover is triggered. parameter. Therefore, if this parameter is set to a higher When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover is preferentially value, the no downlink measurement report handover selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available cannot be triggered. This parameter is used to control the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm. If this parameter is set to 0, the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm is This parameter is set according to the traffic volume. disabled. Therefore, handover decision related to no downlink measurement report is not allowed in this cell. This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. This parameter indicate specifies the drop trend of the receive level within a period. If this parameter is set to a higher value, a more rapid level If this parameter is set to a higher value, a more rapid level drop is required for drop is required for triggering a rapid level drop handover. triggering a rapid level drop handover. This parameter is used together with the Filter Parameters A1 to A8. This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter specifies the uplink quality threshold of an emergency handover. An The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ emergency handover due to bad quality is triggered when the uplink receive quality is handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the greater than or equal to the UL Qual. Threshold. uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell This parameter specifies the downlink receive quality threshold of an emergency The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover. An emergency handover is triggered when the downlink receive quality is handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the greater than or equal to the DL Qual. Threshold. downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell

An emergency handover is triggered when TA is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter. This parameter is used as a switch to control the value determination method of measurement reports. When this parameter is set to Open, if DTX is used, the SUB values in the MR should be selected. Otherwise, the PULL values in the MR should be selected. This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after handover failure due to data configuration.

This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after handover failure due to the Um interface error.

This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after handover failure due to cell congestion. When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for the TCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK. By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a single EMR is inaccurate. When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for the SDCCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK. By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a single EMR is inaccurate. This parameter specifies the penalty time for AMR full rate to half rate (FR-to-HR) handovers. Before the timer expires, no AMR FR-to-HR handover is allowed if the previous FR-to-HR handover fails due to channel unavailability or channel mismatch. The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the penalty time after AMR TCHFH HO Fail is. In other words, triggering AMR handover becomes more difficult. When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the filter for the TCH REP_QUANT. By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate.

This parameter determines the cell coverage for the TA emergency handover. In the areas with small space between BTSs and densely distributed BTSs, the coverage of the cell can be reduced if this parameter is set to a lower value. When this parameter is set to 0 and if the measurement report indicates that DTX is not used, the FULLSET values should be selected. When this parameter is set to 0 and if the measurement report indicates that DTX is used, the SUBSET values should be selected. In latter cases, the If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell for the previous handover will not be selected for the next handover, but the probability of call drop increases. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the probability of handover failure increases. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell for the previous handover will not be selected for the next handover, but the probability of call drop increases. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the probability of handover failure increases. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell for the previous handover will not be selected for the next handover, but the probability of call drop increases. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the probability of handover failure increases. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be modified. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS. The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the penalty time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fail is. In other words, triggering AMR handover becomes more difficult. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be modified.

When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the filter for the This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH REP_QUANT. SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding duration for the MS. the case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this averaging the CV_BEP on the TCH. parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be case that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate. modified. This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for This parameter should be set to a small value because the averaging the CV_BEP on the SDCCH. By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS. case that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this averaging the MEAN_BEP on the TCH. parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be the case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate. modified. This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for This parameter should be set to a small value because the averaging the MEAN_BEP on the SDCCH. SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding duration for the MS. the case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.

. the network performance is degraded. the receive level of the This parameter specifies the penalty level imposed on the target cell. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions. and the system response is delayed. After preprocessing the MRs. If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is equal to or smaller than the value of this parameter. This parameter is used to select the candidate cells during directed retry. When this parameter is set to a higher value. the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. a message indicating When this parameter is set to a higher value. the linear interpolation processing of the lost MRs is performed according to two consecutive MRs that are lost. This parameter should be set on the basis of the data rate and flow on the Abis interface. This parameter is valid only within the Penalty Time after TA HO. This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are lost during interpolation. and the system response is delayed. thus leading to ping-pong handovers. the BTS sends the preprocessed MRs to the BSC. During the penalty time.5 second. This parameter specifies the penalty on the signal strength of the original serving cell to avoid ping-pong handovers after an emergency handover due to the timing advance. Thus. the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. the impact of sudden changes is reduced. Huawei This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the channel quality on the SDCCH. all previous measurement reports are discarded and the handover may fail. the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. A penalty level is imposed on a target cell to avoid further attempts when a handover fails due to any of the following reasons: cell congestion. This parameter is valid only within the duration of the cell penalty time. When this parameter is set to a higher value. the BTS sends preprocessed MRs to the BSC every 0. This parameter specifies the degree of penalty imposed on the original serving cell where an emergency handover associated with bad signal quality is initiated. When this parameter is set to an excessive value. If this parameter is set to a higher value. This parameter specifies the frequency at which the BTS sends the preprocessed MR to the BSC. The penalty level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. Thus. Thus. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions. the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the speech/data TCH signal strength. thus leading to ping-pong handovers. The TA value in a single MR may be inaccurate. other cells are given higher priority and handover to the original serving cell is not allowed. the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS. and the system response is delayed. If this parameter is set to a higher value. the network performance is degraded. the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell. the network performance is Measurement reports fail to be decoded correctly when the signal strength in the serving cell is poor. the impact of sudden changes is reduced. You can set this parameter to average the TA value in multiple MRs. a message indicating internal handover refusal is received. Thus. 110 dBm to -47 dBm. This parameter is defined to avoid ping-pong handover and is valid only within the Penalty Time after BQ HO. If this parameter is set to a lower value. the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell. This parameter specifies the number of MRs used for averaging the signal strength in neighbor cells. and the system response is delayed. thus leading to ping-pong handovers. the adjacent cell can equal to the value of this parameter. If this parameter is set to a higher value. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the timing advance. This parameter specifies the penalty level imposed on a target cell. the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. the impact of sudden changes is reduced. The level values 0 through 63 map to be selected as a candidate cell for directed retry. If this parameter is set to a lower value. if this parameter is set to Twice every second. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the signal strength on the SDCCH. the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. Thus. this adjacent cell can be selected as a candidate cell for directed retry. After an emergency handover is performed due to bad quality. the impact of sudden changes is reduced. The average TA value serves as the basis for handover decision. other cells are given higher priority This parameter specifies the duration of the penalty imposed on the original cell where an emergency handover associated with bad signal quality is initiated. If this parameter is set to a higher value. For example. If this parameter is set to a lower value. Therefore. If the receive If the receive level of an adjacent cell is greater than or level of an adjacent cell is greater than the value of this parameter. If this parameter is set to a lower value. After an emergency handover is performed due to TA.This parameter specifies the duration of the penalty imposed on the original serving cell after an emergency handover due to timing advance is performed. the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell. thus leading to ping-pong handovers. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the speech/data TCH signal strength. the flow on the Abis interface is increased. the network performance is degraded. When the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is greater than the value of this parameter. Thus. After an emergency handover is performed due to TA. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions. Thus. other cells are given higher priority and handover to the original serving cell is not allowed. If the preprocessed MR is sent at a high frequency. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS.

ping-pong handovers are likely to This parameter specifies whether to allow the inter-BSC SDCCH handover. if the load of a non-BCCH frequency is higher than the Load Threshold for TIGHT This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH handover. specified by this parameter. 0: NO. The parameter is used to avoid frequent handovers. and a subsequent handover is allowed only after the timer expires. 1: YES None . If this parameter is set to a too small value. This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive handovers. It can decrease the interference. parameter should be set to No. After the handover prohibition time for the initial access of an MS. No handover is allowed during the minimum interval. This parameter specifies whether to penalize the target cell where a handover fails or Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes. the MS does not use the maximum transmit power. and concentric cell handovers) that require power compensation may fail. This parameter should be set to Yes if the inter-BSC SDCCH handover is allowed. handovers. BCCH HO. In addition. on the target cell to avoid the handover of the MS to the cell. an emergency handover timer is started. if the load of a non-BCCH frequency is higher than the Load Threshold for TIGHT This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH handover.When MR preprocessing is enabled. and thus the handover success rate is decreased. the MS can be handed over to another channel due to inaccurate measurement reports in the initial phase only if the time during which the MS occupies the TCH is longer than the period of call establishment. the BTS should send the preprocessed MR and timeslots configured in SDCCH/8 scheme. the UL and DL balance measurement is affected if Transfer BS/MS Power Class is This parameter specifies whether the BS/MS power class should be transferred from the set to No. If this parameter is set to a too great value. If measurement reports are processed on the BTS side. When the conditions for an emergency handover are met. load handovers. frequent handovers cannot be avoided. This parameter is used to avoid unwanted handovers due to After a new SDCCH is assigned to an MS. and Sent Freq. A timer starts after a handover is complete. a penalty is performed you need to disable the penalty for a certain handover. No emergency handover is allowed during the minimum interval. This parameter specifies whether the BTS should preprocess MRs. the handovers (such as PBGT BTS to the BSC. In this case. If measurement reports are processed on the BTS side.of preprocessed MR parameters are invalid. When this parameter is set to NO. the BSC preprocesses the measurement reports. The purpose is to minimize system interference and improve signal quality. This parameter is set to NO if power control is performed by the BSC. the MS can be handed over to another SDCCH in another BSC before a TCH is assigned. but the network interference is reduced. set the related penalty time and penalty level to 0. the MS can be handed over to another channel inaccurate measurement reports generated in the initial only if the time during which the MS occupies the SDCCH is longer than the period phase of call establishment. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the signaling on the Abis If this parameter is set to Yes. This parameter specifies whether an MS can use the optimum transmit power instead of the maximum transmit power to access the new channel after a handover. improve the conversation quality. The ATCB handover algorithm can determine the coverage areas of the OL subcell and the UL None subcell and balance the load between the OL subcell and the UL subcell and between the UL subcell and the adjacent subcell according to the actual networking. the MS with conversation quality higher than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the cell edge is handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency. if there are more than two to the BSC. This parameter determines whether transmit power is controlled by the BTS or by the BSC. you can set Report Frequency of the Preprocessed This parameter can be used to avoid unwanted handovers After a new TCH is assigned to an MS. then this the original MR to the BSC. This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive emergency handovers. This parameter specifies whether the BTS should send the original measurement report In 4:1 multiplexing mode. handovers cannot be performed timely. specified by this parameter. Another emergency handover decision can be made only when the timer expires. When the TA is great or the signal quality is bad. Transfer BS/MS Power Class. This parameter is set to YES if power control is performed by the BTS. When this parameter is set to YES. If this parameter is set to a too small value. According to the P/N criterion. The value of this parameter is the length of the timer. If this parameter is set to Yes. handovers cannot be performed timely. you can set Report Frequency of the Preprocessed This parameter specifies the switch of the ATCB handover algorithm. If the target cell is congested and an incoming cell handover fails. the MS with conversation quality higher than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the cell edge is handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency. and achieve the aggressive According to the P/N criterion. BCCH HO. This parameter specifies whether the quick handover is enabled. frequent handovers cannot be avoided. If the serving cell where the TA is too great or the signal quality is too bad. the Transfer Original MR.

The greater the value of this parameter is set.This parameter specifies the threshold of the half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover. Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of a serving cell = configured Inter-layer HO Threshold Inter-layer HO Hysteresis Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of an adjacent cell = configured Inter-layer HO This parameter is one bit of the 16 bits that are used by the BSC to sort the candidate cells for handovers. If the DL receive level of a cell is lower than the Inter-layer HO Threshold. difficult the layered hierarchical handover can be triggered. a PBGT handover is triggered and the MS is handed over to the adjacent cell. If this parameter is set to a too great value. a PBGT handover is triggered and the MS is handed over to the adjacent cell. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. the triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met for N consecutive seconds with P measurement seconds. The greater the value of this parameter is set. if the signals in the candidate cell are better than those in the serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. This parameter is used with the can be triggered. According to the P/N criterion. an unwanted cell may become the target cell. Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >= (Minimum downlink power of the candidate cell for handover + Minimum access level offset) The M criterion is met if the Filtered uplink level of the adjacent cell >= (Minimum The M criterion supports the minimum value constraint of uplink receive level of the adjacent cell. This parameter does not affect the dynamic non-AMR full-rate to half-rate handover. the more difficult the PBGT handover can be triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. This leads 1. difficult the AMR handover can be triggered. an intra-cell full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH difficult the AMR full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover handover is triggered if the radio quality indication (RQI) remains higher than the configured F2H HO Threshold for a predefined period. This parameter must be properly set because it limits the number of candidate cells. This parameter specifies whether the AMR handover is enabled. When an AMR call occupies a half-rate TCH. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the more handover is triggered. the ECSC parameter should also be set to Yes. That is. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. This leads to None Note that in hierarchical handover and load handover. if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. . an unwanted cell may become the candidate cell. The greater the value of this parameter is set. According to the P/N criterion. a layered hierarchical The greater the value of this parameter is set. This parameter is used to avoid inter-layer ping-pong handovers. This parameter must be properly set because it limits the number of candidate cells. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. The triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are the F2H HO Threshold or the H2F HO This parameter determines the period during which the triggering conditions of the intracell full-rate to half-rate handover are met. the priority of the target cell must be higher than the Inter-layer HO Threshold. This parameter is used with the can be triggered. If this parameter is set to a too small value. The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N criterion. the more The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N criterion. some desired cells may be excluded from the candidate cells. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. the more handover is triggered. the cell is listed in the candidate cells based This parameter specifies whether the inter-system handover and cell reselection are allowed The inter-system handover includes the handover from a 2G cell to the adjacent None 3G cell and from a 3G cell to the adjacent 2G cell. 1. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. difficult the layered hierarchical handover can be triggered. This parameter specifies the threshold of the full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover. Intracell F-H HO Stat Time and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time. the triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met for N The greater the value of this parameter is set. the more difficult the AMR half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover handover is triggered if the radio quality indication (RQI) remains lower than the configured H2F HO Threshold for a predefined period. According to the P/N criterion. a layered hierarchical The greater the value of this parameter is set. the more When an AMR call occupies a full-rate TCH. If this parameter is set to a too great value. When this parameter is set to Yes. The M criterion supports the minimum value constraint of downlink receive level of an adjacent cell. if the signals in the candidate cell are better than those in the serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. The AMR handover can be triggered only when the Intracell F-H HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes. some desired cells may be excluded from the candidate cells. Expected uplink level of the adjacent cell >= (Min UP Power on HO Candidate Cell + Min Access Level Offset) The M criterion is met if the Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >= (Min DL This parameter specifies the hysteresis of an inter-layer or inter-priority handover. difficult the AMR handover can be triggered. if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. the more difficult the PBGT handover can be triggered. Intracell F-H HO Stat Time and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time. According to the P/N criterion. The greater the value of this parameter is set. the more consecutive seconds with P measurement seconds. an intra-cell half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH The lower the value of this parameter is set. That is.

The TA is calculated based on the distance between the MS and the BTS. the more difficult the edge handover can be triggered. the higher the priority is. the PBGT handover can be performed only on TCHs between the cells of the This parameter specifies whether to enable the rapid level drop handover. an MS can be handed over to a new cell before the occurrence call drop caused by the rapid drop of the receive level of the MS. the edge handover algorithm is enabled. if the UL or DL receive level is lower than its corresponding edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. an edge handover to the adjacent cell is triggered. If the PBGT handover is enabled. To avoid ping-pong handovers. and adjacent channel interference are likely to occur. None None None None Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes. To avoid such a call drop. The propagation loss of the 1800 MHz frequency band is greater than the propagation loss of the 900 MHz frequency band. If the PBGT handover is not enabled and the edge handover threshold is not properly set. an edge handover can be performed. When the receive level is higher the receive level threshold but the transmission quality is lower than the interference handover quality threshold. the edge handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. The cell must have less path loss and meet specific requirements. When the TA is higher than the predefined TA threshold. if the UL or DL receive level is lower than its corresponding edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. Then. an edge handover to the adjacent cell is triggered. A rise in BER may result from too low a signal level or channel interference. When the UL receive level of the serving cell is lower than the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold or the DL receive level of the serving cell is lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold. the level drops rapidly due to multiple barriers. The TA handover determines whether the timing advance (TA) is higher than the predefined TA threshold. co-channel interference. the more difficult the edge handover can be triggered. cross coverage. the MS is This parameter specifies whether the layered hierarchical handover is enabled. According to the P/N criterion. Whether a BQ handover should be enabled depends on the UL and DL transmission quality (BER). The concentric cell is used to achieve the wide coverage of the UL subcell and the aggressive frequency reuse of the OL subcell. difficult the edge handover can be triggered. When an MS makes a call at the edge of a cell. Huawei recommends that the PBGT handover algorithm be enabled. If the PBGT handover is not enabled and the edge handover threshold is not properly set. The concentric cell handover can be classified into the UL subcell to OL subcell handover and the OL subcell to UL subcell handover. The greater the value of this parameter is set. According to the P/N criterion. Cells are set to different layers and different priorities to implement the layered hierarchical handover. the more difficult the edge handover can be triggered. When the UL signal quality or the DL signal quality exceeds the BQ handover threshold. The lower the layer is. If the PBGT handover is enabled. if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. This parameter specifies whether to enable the PBGT (POWER BUDGET) handover algorithm. This parameter should be adjusted as required. the edge handover is triggered. If the PBGT handover is enabled. If the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too small value. This parameter specifies whether the bad quality (BQ) handover is enabled. the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased. The greater the value of this parameter is set. This parameter specifies whether the time advance (TA) handover is enabled. the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased. This parameter specifies whether the concentric cell handover is enabled. Considering the preceding factors. The Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold If the UL receive level remains lower than the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold for a period. Based on the path loss. When this function is enabled. The layered hierarchical handover cannot be triggered if the serving cell has the highest priority in the queue or if the level of the target cell is lower than the Inter-layer HO Threshold. In other words. the MS is interfered and needs to be handed over. you can enable the . call drop may easily occur. The lower the hierarchy is. If the PBGT handover is enabled. If the DL receive level remains lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold for a period. and adjacent channel interference are likely to occur. a BQ emergency handover is performed. if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased. co-channel interference. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. a TA handover is triggered. the interference handover is triggered. This parameter specifies whether to enable the edge handover algorithm. The Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold This parameter specifies whether the interference handover is enabled. call drop may easily occur. an The greater the value of this parameter is set. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. Proper use of PBGT handovers helps to reduce cross coverage and to avoid co-channel interference and adjacent channel interference. the higher the priority is. According to the P/N criterion. an edge handover is triggered. The concentric cell handover can improve system capacity and conversation quality. The longer the distance is. calls are handed over to the cells with high priority (priority is related to Layer of the Cell and Cell Priority). the BSC uses the PBGT handover algorithm to search for a desired cell in real time and decides whether a handover should be performed. In other words. the call may drop if the receive level is too low. the more edge handover is triggered. The greater the value of this parameter is set. This parameter should be adjusted as required.According to the P/N criterion. In dual-band networking mode for densely populated urban areas. the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased. cross coverage. the greater the TA value is. based on the layers and priorities. If the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too small value.

the MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell. When PT is set to 31. In the VLR. thus reducing the number of handovers.02 and 05. densely populated urban areas. If this parameter is set to YES. To properly specify the value of this parameter. 0508 and 0408. see GSM Rec. but a smaller value. If this parameter is set to 1. In actual situation. TO. a regular location update timer is defined. when the location update period decreases. the number of handovers can be reduced and a better cell can be assigned to the MS.08. ping-pong location updates occur and the signaling load on the SDCCH It is recommended that you select a greater value. see GSM Cell Reselect Parameters Indication (PI for short).08. This parameter applies only to GSM Phase II MSs. If the value of this parameter increases. Yes for hot-spot areas.This parameter specifies whether an MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell. If this parameter is set to Yes. see the description of the cell reselection hysteresis. sent on the broadcast channel. This parameter specifies the length of the timer for periodic location update. the MS should obtain PI and other parameters for calculating C2 from other bytes of the system information type 4 message. This parameter can prevent frequent location update. that is. the connection rate drops if cell reselection is performed. 20. For details. No for highcell handover is not subject to this parameter. This parameter specifies whether the intra-cell handover is enabled. the target cell to which the MS is handed over may not be the cell with the best signal quality. The MS obtains C1 and C2 of the serving cell at a minimum interval of 5s. in the area with light traffic. For details. It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. This parameter specifies whether to adjust the sequence of candidate cells. this parameter determines the priority of cells. the CRO should be less than 25 dB because excessively large CRO may bring This parameter Cell Bar Qualify (CBQ) is valid only for cell selection. improve success rate of channel assignment. the service performance is improved. If this parameter is set to 0.08 and 04. For details. suburbs. When necessary. speed circumstances When the authentication and ciphering procedures are enabled on the existing network. thus improving the network performance. the MS should obtain PI and other parameters for calculating C2 This parameter specifies the manual correction of C2. the MS is informed whether C2-based cell reselection is performed. the usage of radio resources drops. Actually. Setting this parameter larger can prolong the average service life of MS batteries but increase the delay of paging messages and reduce the . If this parameter is set to a too small value. see GSM Rec. For details. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special conditions.In addition. For details. If this parameter is set to Yes. in the area with heavy traffic. the MS power consumption increases. see GSM Rec. Note: A forced intracommon urban areas. The Cell Reselect Penalty Time (PT for short) is used to ensure the safety and validity of cell reselection because it helps to avoid frequent cell reselection. When the signaling traffic of the network increases. This parameter Additional Reselect Param Indication (ACS) is used to inform an MS where cell reselection parameters can be obtained. see GSM Rec. such as 16. The value of CBQ affects the access of the MS to the system. For details. Generally. it becomes more difficult for an MS to access the cell when CRO increases. The MS constantly checks whether a cell reselection is required by referring to following conditions: An MS does not respond to pagings during location update. and balance the traffic load among cells. a least interval of 5s is required for C2-based cell reselection to avoid frequent cell reselection. the handover within the same BSC/MSC takes priority. the number of paging sub-channels on a specific paging channel. The load handover functions between the TCHs within one BSC or the TCHs in the cells of the same layer. indicates whether CRO. This parameter is valid only before the penalty time of cell reselection expires. thus lowering the possibility of losing paging messages. and PT are used. Thus. 0408 and 0508. This parameter specifies whether a handover between signaling channels is enabled. 05. This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs. When the location update period decreases. After the sequence is adjusted. This parameter is used to determine whether cell reselection is performed between different LACs. This parameter specifies the temporary correction of C2. this parameter can be set to Yes. It is invalid for cell reselection. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used This parameter specifies whether a traffic load-sharing handover is enabled. The load handover helps to reduce cell congestion.In addition. 1: barred 0: allowed Together with CBA. extra interference may be introduced when aggressive frequency reuse pattern is used. and rural areas. it is The larger this parameter is set. the number of paging sub-channels in a cell None None None The settings of RXLEV-ACCESS-MIN and CRO should guarantee that cells with same priority have the same cell reselect offset. the larger the number of paging sub-channels in a cell and the smaller the number of MSs on each paging sub-channel. an MS monitors only the associated paging sub-channel. If this parameter is properly configured. and the average This parameter specifies the number of multi-frames in a cycle on the paging channel. or 25. 05. the MS re-calculates C1 and C2 value of all non-serving cells (adjacent cells). such as 2 or 3. It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load.

For different cells in the same LAC. 04. and RELEASE INDICATION messages are received. the BSC deactivates the channel. this parameter is set to 10 ms. Together with CBQ. this parameter is set to 20 ms. If this parameter is set to 1 and Cell Bar Quality (CBQ) is set to 0. If TDM transmission is used on the Abis interface. if the timer T3109 (AMRHR) expires. This condition applies to a dual-network coverage cell. In an intra-cell handover. this may influence the call reestablishment success rate. Value 1 indicates that cell access is not allowed. the outgoing BSC handover fails. CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION. the timer T3109 (AMRHR) stops. After the timer expires. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRHR) timer expires. This parameter is an information element (IE) in the system information type 2 and 6 messages. this may influence the handover success rate. if the timer T3109 (AMRFR) expires. The algorithm specifies three parameters: Tx-integer (T for short). their ATTs must be the same. T should be set to a great value. the MS makes another attempt to access the network after the timer expires. the RF CHAN REL message is sent to the BTS after the timer expires. Each bit maps with an NCC (0-7) and the most significant bit corresponds to NCC 7.08. this may influence the handover success rate. This parameter specifies the number of timeslots between the consecutive transmissions of channel request messages by an MS. If the number of RACH conflicts in a cell is large. If this timer is set to a higher value. For the call on the TCH in stable state. the timer is initiated when the ERROR INDICATION. the timer T3109 (AMRHR) is initiated. If this timer is set to a lower value. If bit N is This parameter specifies the cell bar access (CBA). This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover success message after a handover command is sent in an outgoing BSC handover. For details. If this timer is set to a higher value. the BSC sends a handover failure message. 04. None The most significant three bits of BSIC for all cells map with the NCC. network connection is not provided after the MS is powered off. The value of this parameter has a byte (eight bits). The CBA function applies to special conditions. This parameter specifies the timer carried by the WaitIndcation information element when the BSC sends an immediate assignment reject message to an MS. If the timer expires. If this parameter is set to Yes. If this timer is set to a higher value. the timer T3109 (AMRFR) is initiated. thus saving the network processing time and network resources. If this timer is set to a lower value. If this timer is set to a higher value. If this timer is set to a lower value. . This parameter specifies the connection release delay timer that is used to delay the channel deactivation after the main signaling link is disconnected. maximum number of retransmissions (RET). the timer stops. If this timer is set to a higher value. T should be set to a small value. Value 0 indicates that cell access is allowed. and the purpose is to reserve a period of time for repeated link disconnections. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. and the call reestablishment allowed is set to Yes for the cell where the call is. this needs to keep the test duration for continuously transmitting the uplink data of the old channel. the BSC deactivates the channel. For a common cell. This parameter specifies the NCCs to be reported by the MSs in a cell. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. The BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and enables the timer T3109. This parameter affects the paging response time of an MS and the system performance. this parameter should be If the number of RACH conflicts in a cell is small.This parameter specifies the number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH. and influences the channel resource utilization. Upon receipt of a CLEAR COMMAND message from the MSC. After the MS receives the immediate assignment reject message. The increase in T and S prolongs the access time of an MS.08. the timer T3103C is initiated after the BSC receives the HANDOVER COMMAND from target channel. the timer T3109 (AMRFR) stops. If a bit in the value of this parameter is set to 1. If the TC resources are changed before and after the handover. None None If this timer is set to a higher value. this may increase the channel load and influence the access success rate. this seizes the radio resources too much. The timer stops after the BSC receives the HANDOVER COMPLETE message. If this timer is set to a lower value. When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the AMRHR encoding mode. only handovers are allowed in a cell. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. After the CCCH is configured. NCC Permitted should be set properly to avoid too many call drops. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the timer T3109 stops. see GSM Rec. this parameter actually indicates the CCCH usage for AGCH and PCH. the MS reports the corresponding measurement report to the BTS. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the AMRFR encoding mode. and S This parameter specifies whether to enable the Attach-detach allowed (ATT) function. The timer T311 is initiated when the BSC receives the REL_IND message from the BTS. If this timer is set to a higher value. To reduce the collisions on the RACH and to improve the efficiency of the RACH. if IP transmission is used on the Abis interface. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. Therefore. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. and direct access of an MS is not allowed. this parameter can be used to determine the priority of cells. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRFR) timer expires. The BSC sends a CLEAR REQUEST message after the timer expires. if the timer T3109 expires. the BSC deactivates the channel. thus affecting the access performance of the whole network. an access algorithm is defined in GSM Rec.

the BSS releases channel resources and cause the congestion. after the BSC sends a handover request message. None This parameter specifies the maximum number of messages in the buffer of the cell None paging group packet when the Paging Messages Optimize at Abis Interface is turned on. After the timer expires. If the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot -the lowest uplink signal None None This parameter specifies the maximum number of paging messages that a cell is allowed None to send within a statistical period. the timer stops. The MS reports a Clear REQ message. the timer T7 stops if the BSC receives a handover acknowledgment message. If this timer is set to a higher value. if T3101 expires before the BSC receives an EST IND message. the timer T3107 is initiated. None Enquire Classmark After In-BSC Handover Enable.This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover complete message after a handover request acknowledgment message is sent by the BSC in 2G/3G handover or inter-BSC handover. this may influence the After the timer T3107 expires. Send Classmark Enquiring Result To MSC Enable. this may waste the message before the timer expires. the BSC sends an outgoing BSC handover failure message. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. the BSS releases the seized SDCCH.5 second. if the BSC receives the CC If this timer is set to a higher value. In an outgoing BSC handover. If this timer is set to a higher value. the timer T3103 is initiated after the BSC sends a handover command. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a higher value. This parameter specifies the average number of paging messages that a cell is allowed to send within a statistical period. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. . If the timer expires. Qtru Signal Merge Switch The QTRU signal merge algorithm is to prevent the calls with great difference between uplink signal strengths from assigning in the same timeslot. If this timer is set to a lower value. In an intra-BSC handover. If this timer is set to a lower value. The timer is initiated after the BSC sends the CR message. the timer T3107 stops if the BSC receives a handover complete message. This parameter specifies the interval between two cell paging group packets. None This parameter specifies whether a cell configured with baseband frequency hopping supports the intelligent power consumption decrease. Before the timer T3103 expires. this may influence the handover success rate. the timer stops if the BSC receives a Handover Complete message. the seized SDCCH channel. this may waste the After the BSC sends a handover command. Before the timer channel resources and cause the congestion. If the BSC receives an EST IND message before T3101 expires. this may influence the handover success rate. If this timer is set to a lower value. The T3101 is started when the BSC sends an IMM ASS message to the BTS. T3107 expires. The BSC monitors the high-level signal and overwhelms the low-level signal per 0. If this timer is set to a higher value. This parameter specifies the timer used in the immediate assignment procedure. the timer T7 is initiated. if the timer expires. Before the timer T7 expires. this may influence the handover success rate. the BSC sends a handover failure message. If this timer is set to a higher value. After the timer T7 expires. If this timer is set to a lower value. which is an None integral multiple of 50 ms. assignment success rate. the BSC sends a handover failure message. If this timer is set to a lower value. T3101 is stopped. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. this may influence the immediate assignment success rate.

When the call drop counters are not optimized. This parameter specifies the scanning result type used from the start of a frequency scanning task to the reporting of a scanning result. When the call drop counters are optimized. the call drops caused by intra-cell handover timeout are not contained in the statistics of call drops. 1 specifies no optimization. None This parameter specifies whether the MS is forced to send a handover access message. None This parameter specifies whether the MS can be handed over to another channel The assignment procedure can reduce the duration of intrathrough assignment procedure in intra-cell handover. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. Frequency scanning refers to the scanning of uplink receive levels of cell frequencies.The cell paging message packaging is determined by the system load. When this parameter is set to Yes. and mean values of the main and 0 specifies optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized. the call drops caused by no MRs for a long time for the MS are not contained in the statistics of call drops. that is. 1 specifies no optimization. the call drops caused by intra-BSC out-cell handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops. maximum. When the call drop counters are not optimized. when the frequency scanning function is enabled. the paging messages are packaged according to the CPU. This parameter specifies whether the BSC reports a cell out-of-service alarm after the cell is out of service. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. When the call drop counters are not optimized. the cell handover. When the call drop counters are not optimized. 1 specifies no optimization. If the paging message packaging timer is enabled. the call drops caused by this reason are None None None None None None None . the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. the call drops caused by incoming-BSC handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops. whether interference band statistics algorithm I or interference band statistics None algorithm II. the call drops caused by outgoing-BSC handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops. otherwise. the call drops caused by resource check are not contained in the statistics of call drops. the paging messages are packaged according to cells. the BSC does not report a cell out-of-service alarm if This parameter specifies whether the CS services preempt the sublink resources of PS services of low-level BTS for cascaded BTSs if the current-level sublink cannot be preempted. Main/Diversity: current. When the call drop counters are not optimized. the BSC reports a cell out-of-service alarm if the cell is out of service. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized. When the call drop counters are optimized. When the call drop counters are not optimized. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. None This parameter specifies which type of interference band statistics algorithm to use. None None This parameter specifies whether the CS services preempt the sublink resources of PS services. assignment procedure can be used for all types of intra-cell handovers. If this parameter is set to Yes. When the call drop counters are optimized. The scanning result reflects the strength of frequency signals received by the cell. 1 specifies no optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When this parameter is set to No. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized. minimum.

When the call drop counters are optimized. None None None None None None None None None None None None If this parameter is set to Yes. . a wrong decision might be made. In such a case. When the call drop counters are not optimized. the connection failure message is sent by the BTS because the release indication message is sent or the waiting period of call reestablishment times out. When the call drop counters are optimized. 0 specifies optimization. but also increase the total traffic volume of network. This parameter specifies the delay of TRX aiding detection performed after the cell is initialized. handover access failure. 1 specifies no optimization. and radio resource unavailable are not contained in the statistics of call drops. If the parameter is set too small. When the call drop counters are not optimized. The function of repeater is simpler than that of BTS. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. the call drops caused by unsolicited DM response are not contained in the statistics of call drops. 1 specifies no optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. the call drops caused by this reason are This parameter specifies whether the repeater is configured in a cell. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. this parameter is used to specify a delay. When the call drop counters are optimized. the call drops caused by forced handover failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized. When the call drop counters are optimized. When the call drop counters are not optimized. When the call drop counters are not optimized. otherwise. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are not optimized. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized. 1 specifies no optimization. the call drops caused by OM intervention are not contained in the statistics of call drops. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. the asynchronous handover is performed in intra-BSC handover. if the parameter is set too large. a faulty main-BCCH might lead to delayed triggering of TRX aiding function after cell initialization. and the repeater is an extended equipment that is used for the wide area or indoor application solving the problem of blind area. When the call drop counters are optimized. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized. the call drops caused by handover access failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops. Not only the repeater can improve the base station coverage. the call drops caused by T200 timeout are not contained in the statistics of call drops. In optimization. When the call drop counters are not optimized. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. The cell is unstable after initialization. the call drops caused by equipment fault are not contained in the statistics of call drops. a wrong decision might be made in TRX aiding detection. When the call drop counters are not optimized. When the call drop counters are optimized. if the TRX aiding detection starts immediately after cell initialization. 1 specifies no optimization. the call drops caused by Abis territorial link fault are not contained in the statistics of call drops. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. the call drops caused by sequence error are not contained in the statistics of call drops. 1 specifies no optimization. the call drops caused by this reason are not contained in the 0 specifies optimization. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized. When the call drop counters are not optimized. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are not optimized. 1 specifies no optimization. the call drops caused by radio link failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are optimized.the call drops caused by the reasons except for the radio link failure. therefore. 1 specifies no optimization. OM intervention.0 specifies optimization. the synchronous handover is performed. When the call drop counters are not optimized. the call drops caused by radio resource unavailable are not contained in the statistics of call drops.

For details.58. see GSM Rec. the signaling that is. If this parameter is set to Yes. the priority value of the major service should be smaller than that of the minor service. the larger the proportion of discarded packets is. As a result. This parameter specifies the included angle formed by the major lobe azimuth of the antennas in two cells under one BTS. the BTS sends This parameter specifies whether to support the half-rate service in this cell. It is recommended that the default value be used. the load of the access requests on the RACH and the load of all the messages traffic on the Abis interface increases and thus the load of (such as paging messages and packet immediate assignment messages) on the PCH. It is one of None the cell reselection parameters in the system information type 3 message. The flow control function applies to the call management. It is recommended that the default value be used. the priority value of the major service should be smaller than that of the minor service. When the resources are allocated in practice. For details. None If the value of this parameter is too small. 08. When the BSS is congested. Thus.This parameter specifies whether to allow flow control on the Abis interface. This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power level of MSs. The higher the value of this parameter is. It is one of the cell re-selection parameters in the system information type 3 message. Thus. the minimum receive level of MSs is increased to reduce RACH access requests. the priority value of the major service should be smaller than that of the minor service. The higher the value of this parameter is. This parameter specifies the priority of the PS low priority service.58. For details. If the value of this parameter is too great.Included Angle/2 This parameter specifies the number of RACH burst timeslots in a RACH load measurement. It is recommended that the default value be used. see GSM Rec. In a GSM900 cell. the BTS This parameter is used by the BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH timeslot. the larger the proportion of discarded packets is. The value of this parameter indicates the interval during which the BSC determines whether an RACH timeslot is busy. the maximum power control level of the MS ranges from 0 to 19. some service requests are rejected or delayed so that the system load decreases. For the BSC increases. see GSM Rec. message to the BSC.05. the larger the proportion of discarded packets is. the larger the proportion of discarded packets is. great. the BSC cannot process the exceptions in the BTS in If the load on a CCCH timeslot exceeds the value of this parameter. the BSC initiates cell flow control when receiving the RACH overload message from the BTS. The higher the value of this parameter is. the BTS This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send the overload indication frequently reports overload indication messages to the BSC. a wider bandwidth is occupied by services. It is recommended that the default value be used. downlink CCCH overload. The Included Angle refers to the coverage area of the cell. and messages to the MSC and thus the MSC may initiate flow AGCH overload. Antenna Azimuth Angle = actual Antenna Azimuth Angle . This parameter is calculated according to the Included Angle and the actual Antenna Azimuth Angle. The flow control on the Abis interface is mainly used to balance the system load caused by Abis flow. control. If the value of this parameter is too details. Thus. This parameter is used to control the transmit power of MSs. the total bandwidth is expanded by ten times. . This parameter specifies the priority of the CS voice service. the BTS periodically time. the receive level of the MS equals the measured receive level in FH minus the receive level obtained from the timeslots on the BCCH TRX. The actual bandwidth assigned to a user is the value of multiplying the requested bandwidth by the ActGene. If this parameter is set to a too small value. That is.58. the BTS frequently sends the overload messages to the BSC. the system resource utilization decreases and MSs cannot access the network. If the value of this parameter is too small. 08. The parameter here is the value of the actual ActGene multiplied by 10 in fact. 08. the priority value of the major service should be smaller than that of the minor service. This parameter specifies the priority of the CS data service. see GSM Rec. the BSC frequently reports overload indication The overload causes include TRX processor overload. Thus. If the value of this parameter is too great. None This parameter specifies the priority of the PS high priority service. the BTS sends an If the value of this parameter is too small. The higher the value of this parameter is. Thus. 05. This parameter is contained in the Cell Options IE of the system information type 3 and 6 messages. This parameter is imported with the requested bandwidth when the assignment request is sent. The major lobe azimuth is measured from the north to the direction of the cell antenna in a clockwise direction. None None If this parameter is set to a higher value. If this parameter is set to a too great value.

an error is generated. see GSM Rec. If the value of this parameter is too great. For the BTS2X. the interference signals are classified None If this parameter is set to a small value. If the value of this parameter is too small. This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. None and reports the speed to the BSC through the uplink MR. When the output power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level. This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. the BTS periodically sends the CCCH overload message to the BSC. an error is generated. This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. According to the strength of interference signals. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to a too small value. None If this parameter is set to a great value. This helps the BSC to assign channels. This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. This parameter specifies the period during which interference levels are averaged.For details. The value of this parameter when the tower-mounted amplifier is not installed is 3 greater than that when the tower-mounted amplifier is installed. If the value of this parameter is too small. Bits 7-0 indicate the BER threshold. The most significant bit indicates whether the parameter is valid. see GSM Rec. radio resource status is not immediately reported and thus the BSC cannot None This parameter is used for the fast-moving handover decision.58 and 08. This parameter together with VSWR TRX Error Threshold is used to detect whether the antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty.If the load on a CCCH timeslot exceeds the CCCH Load Threshold. and BTS3002C. Therefore. BTS3001C. this parameter is invalid. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. 08. When the output power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level. BTS3001C+. radio resource indication messages are reported frequently and thus the load of the BSC is increased.The Power output error threshold and Power output reduction threshold indicate the two thresholds of the error. The BTS adjusts the MS frequency according to the value of this parameter. the BTS power reduces too much. If this parameter is set to a too great value. If this parameter is set to Yes. It is used to synchronize the MS and the BTS after the BTS is re-initialized. The CCCH overload messages include the uplink RACH overload messages and the downlink PCH This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send radio resource indication messages. the error is small. the interference levels on the idle channels in the period specified by this parameter are averaged. 08. This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. the FCH and SCH signals of adjacent cells do not appear in the same frame to facilitate the MS decoding.If the value of this parameter is greater.This parameter specifies the interval for sending the overload messages. This parameter together with VSWR TRX Error Threshold is used to detect whether the antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty. For other BTSs. For the BTS3X and double-transceiver BTS. This parameter specifies the maximum number of levels by which the BTS RF power decreases. None For the BTS2X. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels.58. Before the BTS sends the radio resource indication message to the BSC. The decrease in the BTS RF power is implemented through dynamic power control and static power control. the BTS power reduces less and the power reduction effect is not good. This helps the BSC to assign channels. In the radio resource indication message. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. For the BTS2X. this parameter is invalid. Bits 14-8 indicate the level threshold.08. the TRX reports the interference level of each idle channel in the measurement period. the error is smaller. The result is used to classify the interference levels on the idle channels into five interference bands. This parameter specifies the start frame number of the BTS. The frame offset technology arranges the frame numbers of different cells under the same BTS to be different from one another by one frame offset. This parameter is used by a BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH timeslot. The value of this parameter has 16 bits. RF resource status is not updated in time. If this parameter is set to a too great value. this parameter is used to compensate the difference of RSSI between the time the tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) is installed and the time the TMA is not installed. For details. According to the strength of interference signals. If this parameter is set to a small value. the BSC cannot handle the interference in the BTS in time. the error is small.The Power output error threshold and Power output reduction threshold indicate the two thresholds of the error. the BTS calculates the speed at which the MS moves towards or away from the BTS. the averaging is performed too frequently and resources are wasted. If the value of this parameter is too great. informing the BSC of the interference levels on idle channels of a TRX. Thus. this parameter is valid. the interference signals are classified This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. the error is small. the average result cannot reflect the change correctly. this parameter is shielded. None None . RF resource status is reported frequently and thus the load of the BSC is increased.

a handover occurs. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 7. This parameter specifies whether to permit the low noise amplifier (LNA) bypass.5K data service is supported. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell. the interference signals are classified This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell. This helps the BSC to assign channels. the probability that the BTS transmits at full power increases. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. the interference signals are classified This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. the BTS transmit power is not adjusted during the handover to ensure the success of the handover. If the level is low. however. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell. Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted is set to Yes. 0000000010: indicates that only the NT12K data service is supported. the discontinuous reception mechanism (DRX) is introduced to the GSM. the BSC needs to consider this gain. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. To reduce the power consumption. the BSC cannot adjust the transmit power of the MS and BTS in time. if each cell is configured with two TRXs (O2 or S2). is increased to some extent. the BSC needs to consider this gain. According to the strength of interference signals. This parameter is configured for only the BTS3002C. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. There are 11 levels of speech quality. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. For the BTS3002C. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 6.This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. the receive quality gain will be obtained. None None None . The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. the receive quality gain will be obtained. The interference increases. The BSC that supports the DRX should send the dispatching message to MSs so that the This parameter specifies the data service supported. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 5. Before performing power control. If this parameter is set to StartUp. The traffic related to AMR and non-AMR is measured separately. According to the strength of interference signals. and thus the speech quality is monitored. This parameter specifies whether to support DRX. According to the strength of interference signals. The BSC measures the traffic on a per VQI basis. When the receive level of an MS drops rapidly. the receive quality gain will be obtained. This helps the BSC to assign channels. the BTS reports the VQI. This helps the BSC to assign channels. This prolongs the service time of the MS battery. Before performing power control. The MS may fail to receive This parameter specifies whether the BTS reports the voice quality index (VQI). The MS that supports the DRX consumes less power to receive broadcast messages that the MSs are interested in. 0000000100: indicates that only the NT6K data service is supported. None This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 8. If this parameter is set to Report. The RF connection supports the configuration of the main and diversity antennas. The handover success rate. the interference signals are classified This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. the BSC needs to consider this gain. None None If this parameter is set to StartUp. The None load of the cell is greater than or equal to the Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold. In addition. the receive quality gain will be obtained. According to the strength of interference signals. Before performing power control. In this case. This value of the parameter can be set as required. This helps the BSC to assign channels. 0000000001: indicates that only the NT14. the BSC needs to consider this gain. the VQI can be measured and reported. Before performing power control. the BTS transmit power is adjusted to the maximum before the BSC sends a handover command to the MS. For V9R3 and later. the interference signals are classified None None None None If Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable is set to Yes. the directed try procedure is started if the following two conditions are met: The cell supports the directed try procedure. the speech quality is good.

Before performing power control. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell. and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold.When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell. Huawei III power control is performed. the receive quality gain will be obtained. Huawei III power control is performed. None . Huawei III power control is performed. None This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call. the BSC needs to consider this gain. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 2. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 3. Huawei III power control is performed. Huawei III power control is performed. the receive quality gain will be obtained. None None None None None This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC decreases the uplink transmit power. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell. and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold. the BSC needs to consider this gain. None This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call. Huawei III power control is performed. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 1. and when the uplink receive quality is greater than the threshold. None This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call. and when the uplink receive None quality is lower than the threshold. Before performing power control. This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC increases the uplink transmit power.This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 4. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. None This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call. Before performing power control. and when the uplink receive quality is greater than the threshold. the receive quality gain will be obtained. None This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call. None This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call. the receive quality gain will be obtained. Huawei III power control is performed. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell. None This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call. the BSC needs to consider this gain. the BSC needs to consider this gain. Huawei III power control is performed. This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call. and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold. Before performing power control.

The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm None to -47 dBm). Huawei III power control is performed. This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in the uplink power control. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. When the receive level is higher than the threshold. Huawei III power control is performed. None This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call. None This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call. None . Huawei III power control is performed. None This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call. None This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call. Huawei III power control is performed.When the receive level is lower than the threshold. Huawei III power control is performed. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. None This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive level exponential filtering None formula. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. None This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of downlink receive quality. Huawei III power control is performed. This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive quality exponential filtering formula. None This parameter specifies the maximum allowed adjustment step when the BSC decreases the downlink transmit power.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm None to -47 dBm). None This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of uplink None receive level. None This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the uplink power control. This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step when the BSC increases the downlink power. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold.

Huawei III power control is performed. None This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call. None This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive quality exponential filtering formula. Huawei III power control is performed. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the downlink power control. Huawei III power control is performed.This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in the downlink None power control. When the receive level is higher than the threshold. This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the SDCCH None in a power control period. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. None This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive level exponential filtering formula. None This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. None When the receive level is higher than the threshold.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm None to -47 dBm).The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm None to -47 dBm). None This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of downlink receive quality. Huawei III power control is performed. the downlink power control is performed. None This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of downlink receive level. . None This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the TCH in None a power control period. None This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call. the downlink power control is performed.

4% None This parameter specifies the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the None receive quality. the dynamic power 0-16 (0 dB to 30 dB in steps of 2 dB) adjustment capability of the BTS is lowered. Level 0: BER smaller than 0. Level 0: BER smaller than 0. if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to this threshold. Every quality zone has different maximum permissible down adjustment step. ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ).2% to 0. if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to DL Qual. In the Huawei II power control algorithm. If this parameter is set to a lower value. Every quality zone has different maximum permissible down adjustment step. the power control stops. This parameter specifies the AMR maximum down adjustment step permitted by the quality zone 2 (the RQ value is greater than or equal to 3) based on the signal level. Bad UpLEVDiff. Every quality zone has different maximum permissible down adjustment step.2% In uplink power control. If this parameter is set to a higher value. ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). . This parameter specifies the AMR maximum down adjustment step permitted by the quality zone 1 (the RQ value is greater than 0 and less than 3) based on the signal level. if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to UL Qual. then the actual DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain DL Qual. then UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual. the quality zone is divided into three grades (0. Bad Trig Threshold. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed.This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive uplink power control commands. then the actual UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual. If this parameter is set to a lower value. In the Huawei II power control algorithm. 1-2. Bad Trig Threshold. If this parameter is set to a higher value. In the uplink power control. In downlink power control. the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. None Bad UpLEVDiff. None This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the BTS. In the Huawei II power control algorithm. None When the number of missing MRs in a power control period exceeds the value of this parameter. the value of DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold contains the value of None DL Qual. In downlink power control. Bad UpLEVDiff. None This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive uplink power control commands. if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to this threshold. This parameter specifies the maximum step length in decreasing the signal level in power control when the RQ is 0. If this parameter is set to a higher value. None This parameter specifies the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the None receive quality. ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. This parameter further improves the expected level of the uplink power control. This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the receive level. 1-2. This parameter further improves the expected level of the downlink power None control. the quality zone is divided into three grades (0. the quality zone is divided into three grades (0. 1-2. the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a lower value. If this parameter is set to a lower value.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0. Bad UpLEVDiff.

the battery life is reduced. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. Instead. Thus. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. the conversation quality is degraded. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. the quality is good without power control. This parameter specifies the number of downlink measurement reports used for predicting the level in power control. Thus. If this parameter is set to a too great value. When you configure this parameter. the quality is good without power control. the prediction function is applied in the filter to compensate the delay of power adjustment. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. In Huawei II power control algorithm. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for power control. the quality is poor without power control. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. the average filter value in the history measurement report is not used for power control decision. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. Thus. the conversation quality is degraded. the downlink level becomes low. thus the conversation quality is If this parameter is set to a too great value. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. . power control is performed. the uplink level becomes high without power control. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal levels. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for power control. the downlink level becomes low. This parameter determines the uplink quality upper threshold of the quality zone. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. If this parameter is set to a too small value. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. the quality is poor without power control. power control is performed. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. In Huawei II power control algorithm. the uplink level becomes low. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. the quality is poor without power control. power control is performed. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. Thus. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold.When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. If this parameter is set to a too great value. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Thus. the quality is good without power control. the prediction function is applied in the filter to compensate the delay of power adjustment. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. and call drop may easily occur. If this parameter is set to a too great value. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. and call drop may easily occur. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. If this parameter is set to a too great value. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal quality. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment. If this parameter is set to a higher value. the battery life is reduced. When you configure this parameter. This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. Thus. the uplink level becomes high without power control. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Thus. the uplink level becomes low. the average filter value in the history measurement report is not used for power control decision. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the uplink quality for power control. and call drop may easily occur. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. the uplink level becomes high without power control. None None If this parameter is set to Yes. Thus. This parameter specifies whether the compensation of AMR measurement reports is allowed by Huawei II power control algorithm. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. the quality is good without power control. the Huawei II power control algorithm puts the currently received measurement reports in the measurement report compensation queue and then records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Thus. power control is performed. and call drop may easily occur. If this parameter is set to a too small value. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. If this parameter is set to a too small value. conversely. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to a too small value. Instead. This parameter specifies the number of uplink measurement reports used for predicting the level in power control. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. When you configure this parameter. When this parameter is set to Yes. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. the uplink level becomes high without power control. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the BSC or BTS puts the currently received measurement reports in the measurement report compensation queue and then records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and the BTS power in the measurement report. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. thus the conversation quality is If this parameter is set to a too great value. the quality is poor without power control. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal quality. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the stable state quality zone are set. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. Thus.

the power control may be performed frequently.2% In uplink power control. If this parameter is set to a too small value. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value If this parameter is set to a too great value. the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a too small value. When you configure this parameter. the quality zone is divided into three grades (0. A maximum step length of power control is set for each quality zone. If this parameter is set to a too great value. then UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff.2% None If this parameter is set to a too small value. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. the MR that power control decision is based on cannot accurately reflect the radio environment of the BTS during the power adjustment. the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. After the BSC delivers the power control command. the power control may be delayed. the dynamic power adjustment capability of the BTS is lowered. Bad UpLEVDiff. thus wasting the resources. A maximum step length of power control is set for each quality zone. the power ranges from class 0 to class 4. ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous AMR power control commands. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. then the actual DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain DL None Qual. with a step of 2 dB. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. the quality zone is divided into three grades (0. If this parameter is set to a too small value. if the uplink receive quality is higher than or equal to the UL Qual. This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the BTS. the maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality. If this parameter is set to a too small value. In downlink power control. This parameter determines the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the receive quality. In Huawei II power control algorithm. a too great value. if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter. If this parameter is set to signal quality. the maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality. 12. Level 0: BER smaller than 0. the quality zone is divided into three grades (0. the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal levels. If this parameter is set to a too small value. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. If this parameter is set to a too great value. then the actual UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL None Qual. the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a too small value. but misses the latest changes of the receive level and receive quality of the BTS. Therefore.This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal strength before the AMR MS power adjustment. Bad UpLEVDiff. When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level. In the uplink power control. 12. When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level. Bad Trig Threshold. If this parameter is set to a too great value. 12. This parameter further improves the expected level of the uplink power control. Level 0: BER smaller than 0. if the downlink receive quality is higher than or equal to the DL Qual. In downlink power control. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the power adjustment is delayed. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. None . In Huawei II power control algorithm. Thus. When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level. it should wait for a certain period before receiving an acknowledgement message. This parameter further improves the expected level of the downlink power control. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to receive level. a too great value.Class 0 to class 15 corresponds to 0 dB to 30 dB. the algorithm This parameter determines the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the cannot realize fast power control. the maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality. In Huawei II power control algorithm. If this parameter is set 5. if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter. Bad UpLEVDiff. If this parameter is set to a too small value. A maximum step length of power control is set for each quality zone. Bad Trig Threshold. the algorithm This parameter determines the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the cannot realize fast power control. ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). the value of DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold contains the value None of the DL Qual. ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ).

the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. thus the conversation quality is If this parameter is set to a too great value. When you configure this parameter. the battery life is reduced. the power adjustment is delayed. the battery life is reduced. If this parameter is set to a too small value. power control is performed. and call drop may easily occur. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. Thus. None If this parameter is set to Yes. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment. and call drop may easily occur. Therefore. power control is performed. Thus. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. and call drop may easily occur. the BSC performs weighted filtering on the values of the receive level and of the receive quality in several history measurement reports. but misses the latest changes of the receive level and receive quality of the MS. it should wait for a certain period before receiving an acknowledgement message. Thus. power control is performed. If this parameter is set to a too great value. . you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value None If this parameter is set to a too great value. the BSC or BTS puts the currently received measurement reports in the measurement report compensation queue and then records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and the BTS power in the measurement report. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the uplink level becomes low. Thus. This parameter specifies whether enable Huawei II power control algorithm or Huawei III power control algorithm. When determining whether to perform power control. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. the battery life is reduced. the quality is good without power control. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. the conversation quality is degraded. This parameter specifies whether the compensation of measurement reports is allowed by Huawei II power control algorithm. the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal quality. the quality is poor without power control. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. the quality is good without power control. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for power control. Thus. If this parameter is set to a too great value.After the BSC delivers the power control command. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. the signal quality is good without power control. the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal levels. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the conversation quality is degraded. When you configure this parameter. the quality is poor without power control. If this parameter is set to a too small value. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. the conversation quality is degraded. When you configure this parameter. On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to a too great value. Thus. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. Thus. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal strength before the MS power adjustment. This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the uplink quality for power control. the downlink level becomes low. the uplink level becomes high without power control. When you configure this parameter. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the signal quality of the MS is poor without power control. Thus. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for power control. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. The measurement reports may be obtained by the BTS/MS at This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. Thus. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. If this parameter is set to a too small value. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the uplink quality for power control. the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal levels. the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus. power control is performed. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. the quality is good without power control. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. the downlink level becomes low. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the quality is poor without power control. the uplink level becomes high without power control. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. Thus. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal quality. the MR that power control decision is based on cannot accurately reflect the radio environment of the BTS during the power adjustment. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set.

This parameter is used for the open-loop power control. This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to periodically filter the signal level in the packet transfer mode. the uplink level becomes high without power control. None This parameter specifies the channel where the receive power level of the MS is measured for the uplink power control. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to a too great value. This parameter is used when the MS measures the downlink signal strength in the packet transfer mode and calculates Cn of This parameter specifies the signal strength filter period in the packet idle mode. If this parameter is set to a higher value. Thus. this wastes the wireless resources and influences the the access performance of other MSs in the network. the influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases. the proportion of the history value in the interference measurement results decreases. keep this TBF unreleased by continuously resending the last downlink data block with the Relative This parameter specifies the inactive period of the extended uplink TBF. This parameter specifies the signal strength filter period in the transfer mode. If this parameter is set to a lower value. the tolerance of the network to uplink errors decreases and the probability of the frequent TBF release increases. Upon setting the RRBP field in the downlink RLC data block. thus increasing the . After the network starts to assign a USF value to the uplink TBF (uplink TBF is established). the output power of the MS decreases. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. thus wasting the uplink resources. the release delay of the uplink TBF increases. If this parameter is set to a higher value. This parameter is used when the MS measures the downlink signal strength in the packet idle mode and calculates Cn of the MS output This parameter specifies the initial power level. In uplink dynamic assignment mode. If this parameter is set to a lower value. if this parameter is set to a lower value. the abnormal TBF may occur (such as the MS has not received the message of If this parameter is set to a higher value. Therefore. the network does not immediately notify the MS of releasing this TBF but forcedly set the last data block not received. the network does not release this uplink TBF immediately but set it to the inactive mode. the tolerance of the network to downlink errors decreases and the probability of the frequent TBF release increases. the multiple MSs can share one uplink channel if the downlink data blocks carry the USF value. To transmit the uplink RLC data blocks during inactive period. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. the MS can use this TBF that automatically becomes active None If this parameter is set to a higher value. If this parameter is set to a higher value. the abnormal uplink TBF release increases caused by the overflow of the N3103. If this parameter is set to a higher value. if this parameter is set to a lower value. the power control may be performed frequently. If this parameter is set to a higher value. the network resets the N3105 when it receives the packet acknowledgment message from the MS on the uplink RLC data block corresponding to the RRBP field. None If this parameter is set to a lower value. and call drop may easily occur. After sending the last downlink RLC data block and confirming that all downlink data blocks are received. The network reserves the RLC uplink blocks mapping This parameter specifies the release delay of the downlink TBF. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the N3101 is initiated. Upon receiving the last uplink RLC data blocks (CountValue=0) from the MS that supports the extended uplink TBF function. the influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases. This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous power control commands. the release time of the uplink TBF delays due to no response of the MS caused If this parameter is set to a lower value. This parameter specifies the maximum value of N3105. If this parameter is set to a higher value. the power control may be delayed. thus wasting the resources. This parameter determines the expected receive signal strength on the BTS when the MS uses the GPRS dynamic power control. this parameter determines the reduced level of the MS transmit power mapping to the path loss. the proportion of the history value in the interference measurement results increases. the influence of Cn1 on Cn increases. if this parameter is set to a lower value. thus causing the useless signaling seizing the channel bandwidth and wasting the downlink resources. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. the abnormal TBF may occur (such as the MS does not receive the message of If this parameter is set to a lower value. This parameter specifies the reduced power of the BTS on the PBCCH. which is used to set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the packet idle mode. After a downlink TBF is established. if this parameter is set to a lower value. PCH. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. the uplink level becomes low. otherwise. the output power of the MS increases. The MS uses the Alpha parameter to calculate the output power of the uplink PDCH. the uplink TBF frequently releases and establishes. Upon receiving the last RLC data block when the uplink transmission is complete. which is used to set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the packet transfer mode.The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. the network increases N3105 This parameter specifies the maximum value of the N3103. If the network does not receive a packet control acknowledgment message within This parameter specifies the maximum value of N3101. namely. the influence of Cn1 on Cn increases. This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to periodically filter the signal level in the idle mode. the network initiates the N3105. The MS obtains valid measurement signals by sampling for NAVGI times. the network sends the MS a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message with FAI=1 and initiates the N3103. This parameter specifies the constant of filtering the collision signal strength for power control. When the MS uses the GPRS dynamic power control.

if this parameter is set to a lower value. the network sends the MS a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message with FAI=1 to notify the MS of releasing this uplink TBF. If this parameter is set to a higher value. To establish the downlink TBF on the unreleased uplink TBF. The load-based cell reselection is available to the MSs that the receive level is lower than this threshold. and the This parameter specifies the interval between two NC2 cell reselections in a cell. and the If this parameter is set to a higher value. This parameter specifies whether enabling the normal cell reselection algorithm is allowed. None This parameter specifies whether a 2G cell or 3G cell is selected in the inter-RAT cell reselection procedure. If this parameter is set to a higher value. the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened decreases. the previous MR is thought to be invalid. thus greatly reducing the downlink TBF establishment time. and the critical reselection is triggered difficultly. Upon receiving the last uplink RLC data block (CountValue=0). None This parameter specifies whether enabling the critical cell reselection algorithm is allowed. If this parameter is set to a lower value. if this parameter is set to a higher value. the weight of the previous signal level increases. None This parameter specifies whether enabling the cell load-based reselection algorithm is allowed. and the If this parameter is set to a higher value. the load-based reselection is triggered easily. you can infer that the transmission and the critical reselection is triggered difficultly. MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold.This parameter specifies the release delay of the non-extended uplink TBF. the cell reselection is allowed. however. MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold. the number of cell reselections increases. the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened increases. If the times that the transmission quality is worsened decreases. If this parameter is set to a higher value. None This parameter specifies the number of MRs used for averaging the signal strength in neighbor cells. If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost exceeds this parameter. parameter is set to a lower value. if this parameter is set to a lower value. After This parameter specifies that the MS performs the load-based cell reselection can be controlled. the network will notify the MS of releasing this uplink TBF for a period of delay after this parameter is set. the number of This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE GMSK transmission quality. if this parameter is set to a lower value. if this parameter is set to a lower value. this can increase the probability of establishing the downlink TBF on the PACCH. you can infer that the transmission quality is worsened. the probability of the cell reselection increases. if this quality is worsened. the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened increases. If the number of times is lower than this parameter. if the MS needs to send new uplink data. This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are lost. If this parameter is set to a higher value. If the times that the transmission quality is worsened decreases. if this quality is worsened. This parameter is used to collect the statistics of GPRS transmission quality. the decision may not be performed immediately. because the BSC6000 does not support the If this parameter is set to a higher value. if this parameter is set to a lower value. the number of cell reselections decreases. the weight of current signal level increases. If this parameter is set to a higher value. the number of This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE 8PSK transmission quality. If the receive quality is equal to or greater than this threshold. the load-based reselection is triggered difficultly. you can infer that the transmission and the critical reselection is triggered difficultly. None . parameter is set to a lower value. This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive level of the serving cell is lower than the level threshold of cell reselection within the Normal Cell Reselection Watch Period. the precision of decision may be reduced. the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened increases. the probability of the cell reselection decreases. This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive levels of the serving cell are continuously calculated before the P/N criterion is determined.

In version V9R8. The POC services have a strict requirement on the transmission delay. the critical reselection is triggered difficultly. calculated number of times and the number of times in the downlink transmission quality measurement report reaches this threshold. This higher level. it is difficult to trigger the load-based reselection. the cell will receive the MSs from other cells due to the load-based reselection if the TBF multiplexing rate is lower than corresponding percentage. the BSC reserves uplink resources for the BTS. The GPRS GSN provides different subscribers with flexible QoS mechanism. To avoid ping-pong handovers. and supports the handover between the overlaid subcell and the underlaid subcell. if the overlaid voice services are congested. The load-based reselection is enabled when the cell load is higher than this threshold. delay class. . The network should support the detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services. If this parameter is set to a higher value. The POC services have a strict requirement on the transmission delay. This parameter specifies the policy of the handover between the underlaid subcell and the overlaid subcell in a PS domain. That is. it is difficult for the MS to reselect this cell. If the service type carried in the received message is POC. the critical reselection is triggered easily. If the service type carried in the received message is POC. This parameter specifies the maximum transmission delay of the POC services. This parameter specifies the minimum receive level that is required for a cell to serve as None a candidate cell for handover. it is easier to trigger the load-based reselection. this only involves the takeover of the uplink immediate assignment. The critical reselection needs to be performed when the ratio of the accumulatively reselection is triggered difficultly. the critical MS. If this parameter is set to a higher value. the time greatly reduces. the critical reselection is triggered easily. This parameter specifies that the Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed can be determined when the transmission quality in the received downlink transmission quality measurement report is lower than this threshold. and throughput class. conversely. The network should support the detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services. The QoS control parameters include the service priority class. This parameter specifies that the accumulatively calculated number of times that the downlink transmission quality of MS is lower than the transmission quality threshold of If this parameter is set to a higher value. the uplink/downlink This parameter specifies whether to support the packet assignment. if this parameter is set to a lower value. If the service type carried in the received message is POC. If the value of this parameter increases. The QoS level is determined in the subscription. conversely. if this parameter is set to a lower value. To improve the speed of the MS to access the network. This parameter specifies whether to support the QoS optimization. the MS can be handed over to the parameter is valid only within the Cell Penalty Last Time. If this parameter is set to a higher value. The setting of this parameter is to avoid the ping-pong reselection between cells. the BSC supports the PDCH configured in the overlaid subcell or in the underlaid subcell.This parameter specifies that if the cell load is lower than this threshold. This parameter specifies the penalty duration for the cell reselection. the overlaid-tounderlaid subcell handover is only allowed. if this parameter is set to a lower value. it is easier for the MS to reselect this cell. target cell only if the target cell has a lower level. The cell penalty can be performed within the Cell Penalty Last Time only. reliability class. after the packet assignment is taken over to the BTS. the uplink/downlink This parameter specifies the lower limit of the bandwidth for the POC services. The BTS obtains the channel request information of the MS None This parameter is configured according to the congestion of the underlaid (UL) and overlaid (OL) voice services. the underlaid-to-overlaid None None None When this parameter is set to Yes. the MS can be This parameter specifies the signal level for target cell penalty after the BSC receives the handed over to the target cell only if the target cell has a cell reselection failure message or after the cell initiates the load-based reselection. the assignment of the packet channel to the MS through the PACCH. The POC services have a strict requirement on the transmission delay. The network should support the detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services. If the underlaid voice services are congested. that is. when this parameter specifies the cell reselection. the level of the target cell should higher than the total of the Min Access Level Threshold and the Cell Reselection Hysterisis. the MS cannot be handed over to the target cell that the previous reselection fails or the load-based reselection occurs within the time longer than this value. the cell can receive the MSs from other cells due to the load-based reselection. the access delay of the MS reduces. the Transfer Delay in the This parameter specifies the upper limit of the bandwidth for the POC services. If this parameter is set to a higher value. if this parameter is set to a lower value.

When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter.Setting and effect This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the downlink TBF to change from CS4 to CS3. Gbr:guaranteed bit rate. the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS1 to CS2. thus improving the quality of links. you dynamically adjust the MCS types of other TBFs based on the signal transmission quality. it is easy to decrease the CS type. which is used for the MS to calculate the measurement results. . This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the If this parameter is set to an excessive value. you should set this parameter to a value among MCS1-MCS9. When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter. increase the CS type. When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink. . it is easy to decrease the CS type. it is hard to increase the CS type. the access delay of the MS reduces. the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS3 to CS4. you should fixedly use an MCS type for all This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled uplink. it is easy to downlink TBF to change from CS2 to CS3. If this parameter is set to a modest When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value value. the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS2 to CS1. the BSS pre-allocates the uplink TBF resources and sends these resources to the BTS. This parameter specifies the average period of bit error detected. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the If this parameter is set to an excessive value. you should dynamically adjust the MCS types of other TBFs based on the signal transmission quality. the modulation scheme and coding scheme can be changed to dynamically adapt to the radio transmission environment. you should set the MCS type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. When the MS initiates the channel request. This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled uplink. To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink. the QoS parameters are obtained from the ABQP in the PFC. To improve the speed of the MS to access the network. If this parameter is set to a modest value. increase the CS type. it is hard to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value. If this parameter is set to a modest value. the QoS parameters are obtained from the DL UNITDAT of the SGSN or from the uplink request of the MS. of this parameter. To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink. None If this parameter is set to an excessive value. This parameter can be used to obtain the forgetting factor. it is hard to increase the CS type. This parameter specifies the mode of controlling the quality of links. the BTS uses the pre-allocated resources to send the immediate assignment When both the MS and the network support PFC. It is relative to the uplink immediate assignment. Then. you should set this parameter to UNFIXED. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink. the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS2 to CS3. To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. you should set the MCS type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. set the parameter to MCS4. None None None The higher the value of this parameter is. of this parameter. you should set this parameter to a value among MCS1-MCS9. it is easy to downlink TBF to change from CS3 to CS4. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink. When this parameter is set to Yes. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the downlink TBF to change from CS3 to CS2. To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink. of this parameter. it is hard to increase the CS type. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the downlink TBF to change from CS2 to CS1. If this parameter is set to a modest When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value value. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the If this parameter is set to an excessive value. set the parameter to MCS6. Then. the smaller the proportion of the BEP history information sent by the MS is. increase the CS type. None For the cell with the good Um interface quality. During the data transmission process. you should fixedly use an MCS type for all This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled downlink. set this parameter to UNFIXED. the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS3 to CS2. it is easy to downlink TBF to change from CS1 to CS2.This parameter specifies whether to support the takeover of the packet immediate assignment by the BTS. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink. the larger the proportion of the BEP history information sent by the MS is. for the cell with the poor Um interface quality. This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled downlink. it is easy to decrease the CS type. it is hard to decrease the CS type. it is hard to decrease the CS type. otherwise. If this parameter is set to a modest When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value value. the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS4 to CS3. When the MS or the network does not support PFC.

This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink If this parameter is set to an excessive value. CS3. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS2 to CS1. set the CS type for transmitting the None first TBF through this parameter. If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS3 to CS2. . all TBFs use the default CS This parameter specifies the fixed CS type used on the downlink. To dynamically adjust the CS type on the uplink. this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. it is easy to decrease the CS type. the CS types of other TBFs are dynamically adjusted based on the signal transmission quality. it is hard to increase the CS type. or CS4. this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter. If this parameter is set to a modest value. CS2. this parameter. it is hard to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of value. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS THP3. the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS4 to CS3. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter. it is hard to decrease the CS type. This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the uplink. this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. this parameter is set to UNFIXED. If this parameter is set to a modest value. this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter. this parameter. this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. it is easy to increase the CS type. set the CS type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS4 to CS3. If this parameter is set to a modest value. If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the uplink. the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS1 to CS2. Then. If this parameter is set to a modest value. this parameter is set to UNFIXED. this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the downlink. None None If this parameter is set to an excessive value. increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value. this parameter can be set to CS1. CS2. this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS3 to CS2. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of this parameter. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Traffic Handle Priority 1 (THP1). it is easy to TBF to change from CS2 to CS3. To dynamically adjust the CS type on the downlink. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. increase the CS type. the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS2 to CS3. it is easy to decrease the CS type. This parameter specifies the fixed coding scheme (CS) type used on the uplink. This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS THP2. it is hard to increase the CS type. Then. the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS3 to CS4. this parameter can be set to None CS1. it is hard to decrease the CS type. it is easy to decrease the CS type. the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS2 to CS1. If this parameter is set to a modest When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of value. If this parameter is set to a modest value. all TBFs use the default CS types. This parameter specifies the weight of QoS background services. If this parameter is set to a modest value. or CS4.This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the downlink. The background class service is a kind of traffic class services. the CS types of other TBFs are dynamically adjusted based on the signal transmission quality. CS3. If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink. If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink If this parameter is set to an excessive value. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS1 to CS2. If this parameter is set to a modest value. it is hard to increase the CS type. it is easy to TBF to change from CS3 to CS4.

this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. and the downlink bandwidth for each subscriber is higher. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. it is difficult to seize dynamic channels. this kind of services occupies low bandwidth.This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS ARP3. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. the dynamic channel is not released immediately. The uplink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs. The total number of excessive PDCHs and insufficient TCHs. if there are new services. this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. If this threshold is high. If the UL voice service is congested. This affects CS TCHs and PDCHs available in a cell is fixed. this timer is started. Reporting the frequencies of three strongest cells . If this parameter is set to an excessive value. This parameter specifies the timer set to release the Abis timeslots. this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. Before the timer expires. None If this parameter is set to an excessive value. This affects PS This parameter specifies the multi-frequency reporting value. If this parameter is set to a modest value. This parameter specifies the PDCH downlink multiplex threshold. If this parameter is set to a modest value. the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are fewer. When a channel is idle. and the If this parameter is set to a lower value. insufficient PDCHs and excessive TCHs. this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. and the uplink bandwidth for each subscriber is higher If this threshold is set to a higher value. Value range: Reporting the frequencies of six strongest cells. the Abis timeslots may be applied frequently. This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS ARP2. the CS services are affected when there are too many PS services. Instead. the dynamic channel is converted at the UL cell. When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the threshold/10. This parameter determines the proportion of PDCHs to the total number If this parameter is set to a modest value. If all TBFs on a dynamic channel are released. the dynamic channel continues to be This parameter specifies the policy for dynamic channel conversion in a concentric cell. If this parameter is set to a lower value. This parameter specifies the downlink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel conversion. If this parameter is set to a modest value. the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are more. The PDCH ratio is equal to PDCHs / (TCH/Fs + services. a timer is started when the channel is idle. dynamic channels are used. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. If this parameter is set to a modest value. this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. it is easy to seize dynamic channels. This parameter specifies the uplink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel conversion. it is possible that a dynamic channel is requested immediately after being This parameter is configured according to the congestion counter of the underlaid (UL) and overlaid (OL) voice services. the Abis timeslots are released. If this threshold is low. This parameter specifies the PDCH uplink multiplex threshold. it is easy to seize dynamic channels. Only full-rate TCHs are the dynamic channels that can be preempted. Control channels cannot be preempted: It indicates that the CS services can preempt all This parameter specifies the timer set to release the idle dynamic channel after all TBFs on the dynamic channel are released. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. Reporting the frequencies of two strongest cells. and the uplink If this threshold is high. it is difficult to seize dynamic When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the threshold/10. If this threshold is set to a higher value. This parameter specifies the levels of dynamic channels preempted by CS services and PS services. When the timer expires. there are This parameter specifies the maximum ratio of PDCHs in a cell. static PDCHs). the idle Abis timeslots cannot be fully used. If this threshold is low. This parameter specifies the number of channels reserved for the CS services. channels. there are of TCHs + PDCHs. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. Reporting the frequency of None one strongest cell. This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Allocation/Retention Priority 1 (ARP1). the dynamic channel resources may be wasted when there are no services for a long time. the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are fewer. All dynamic channels can be preempted: It indicates that the CS services can preempt all the dynamic channels. the PS services are affected. If this parameter is set to a modest value. The downlink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs. dynamic channels are used. If this parameter is set to a modest value. the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are more.

the coverage area of the cell is large. it is easy for the cell to be selected. This parameter specifies whether the SoLSA exclusive access cell is used. if the originating cell and the target cell belong to the same routing area.This parameter specifies the threshold of HCS signal strength. c31standard: applied c31notuse: not applied This parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in the same routing area. 1 0: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is not used for C32 calculation during cell reselection. The usage of cell resources decreases. This parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in different routing areas. Only the MSs customizing the Localised Service Area (LSA) service can access the exclusive cell. This parameter specifies whether the cell can be accessed during cell reselection. if this parameter is set to an excessive value. the power consumption and radiation of the MS are high. When an MS in the ready state performs cell reselection. Prohibit Cell Access: Access is prohibited. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. None This parameter specifies whether the MS is allowed to send a measurement report to the network. it is difficult for the cell to be selected. the MS starts cell reselection only when the signal level of the neighbor cells in different routing areas is higher than that of this cell. Yes: The MS can access another cell. 1: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for C32 calculation during cell reselection. it is hard for cell reselection. If the priority is low. the MS may not be able to access the channel. the frequent ping-pong reselection occurs. the period when cell reselection is prohibited increases. None This parameter specifies the Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) priority of a GPRS cell. the period when cell reselection is prohibited decreases. When an MS in the ready state performs cell reselection. it is hard for cell reselection. If this parameter is set to a modest value. This parameter specifies whether GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis is applied to the C31 standards. None In different routing areas. Permit Cell Access: Access is permitted. This parameter specifies the minimum receive level for an MS in the cell to access the system. The MS on the edge of the cell may not be able to access the system. the coverage area of the cell is small. If this parameter is set to a modest value. Value 0 indicates the lowest priority and value 7 indicates the highest priority. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. it is easy for the MS to select this cell during cell reselection. The frequent cell This parameter specifies whether the PSI status message is supported. the frequent ping-pong reselection occurs. Yes: supported No: not supported None None None In the same routing area. Value range: 0. None . If the threshold of HCS signal strength is low. This parameter specifies whether the MS can access another cell. This parameter specifies the maximum TX power level for an MS to access the packet control channel. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. if the originating cell and the target cell belong to different routing areas. the MS frequently performs cell reselection. The MS uses the signal strength in the MR and this threshold to calculate C31. if this parameter is set to an excessive value. If this parameter is set to a modest value. it is difficult for the MS to select this cell during cell reselection. If this parameter is set to a modest value. This parameter specifies whether GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for C32 calculation during cell reselection. No: The MS cannot access another cell. the C2 value measured in the overlapped area of two adjacent cells fluctuates greatly because of the fading feature of radio channels. If the threshold of HCS signal strength is high. If the priority is high. Therefore. If this parameter is set to a modest value. and when the signal level difference is greater than the value of this parameter. This parameter specifies the period when cell reselection is prohibited. which is used for cell reselection.

If this parameter is set to a modest value. If this parameter is set to a modest value. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 1. radio resources may be wasted. If this parameter is set to a modest value. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. the MS resends the access request. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 4. Level 1 is the highest priority. the PSI1 is sent frequently. A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell.This parameter specifies the repetition period of the PS information PSI1. and level 4 is the lowest priority.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. This parameter specifies the number of PRACH blocks. Otherwise. Value 1 indicates one PRACH. it is difficult for an MS to access the cell. This parameter specifies the persistence level 3 of radio priority access.. the MS cannot access the cell. too many MSs may access If this parameter is set to an excessive value. However. the MS can access the cell. This parameter specifies the persistence level 4 of radio priority access. Level 1 is the highest priority. A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. it is possible that a response is sent. Otherwise. However. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 12. If the priority is higher than the persistence level. If this parameter is set to a modest value. If the priority is higher than the persistence level. the MS cannot access the cell. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 12. If this parameter is set to a modest value.. This parameter specifies the persistence level 1 of radio priority access. the PSI1 cannot be received in real time. . the MS can access the cell. Otherwise. . too many MSs may access If this parameter is set to an excessive value. Therefore. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 2. the MS sends a new Channel Request within a long interval after the channel request fails. Value 2 indicates two PAGCHs. Therefore. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 3. radio resources may be wasted. it is easy for an MS to access the cell. it is difficult for an MS to access the cell. This occupies many resources. and level 4 is the lowest priority. the MS cannot access the cell. This parameter specifies the persistence level 2 of radio priority access. but the MS has not received it because None None None None This parameter specifies the access control class. If the priority is higher than the persistence level. it is difficult for an MS to access the cell. Value 2 indicates two PRACHs. If the priority is higher than the persistence level. the MS sends a If this parameter is set to an excessive value. None None None . This parameter specifies the number of PAGCH blocks. it is easy for an MS to access the cell. This may affect MS services. A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. it is easy for an MS to access the cell. the MS needs to wait for a long time before sending the next request. If no response is received after the minimum number of timeslots. If this parameter is set to a modest value.. it is difficult for an MS to access the cell. radio resources may be wasted. This parameter specifies the minimum number of timeslots between two successive channel requests. However.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. This parameter specifies the number of timeslots for extension transmission in random access. radio resources may be wasted. Therefore. The MS sends an access request and waits for a response. None If this parameter is set to an excessive value. the MS cannot access the cell..The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. it is easy for an MS to access the cell. A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. This parameter affects the interval for the MS to send a new Channel Request after the channel request fails. too many MSs may access If this parameter is set to an excessive value. Level 1 is the highest priority. and level 4 is the lowest priority. If this parameter is set to a modest value. and level 4 is the lowest priority. the MS can access the cell. too many MSs may access If this parameter is set to an excessive value. thus reducing access collisions but slowing down the MS access speed. Level 1 is the highest priority. However. the MS can access the cell. Therefore. Otherwise. Value 1 indicates one PAGCH.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value. When the MS is in idle mode. the reselection idle mode. The value indicates a higher access priority. some information may be missing. Yes: The MS can receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the GPRS service. This parameter specifies whether the CS paging on the A interface is supported. This parameter specifies the frequency index of the interference measurement in type 3 None of the extension measurement report. affected. coverage area of the micro cell is large. This parameter specifies the interval between two extension measurement reports. the access delay of the EGPRS MS is shortened. Value 1 indicates one PBCCH. the MS does not select this cell when the duration of signal strength on the BCCH is shorter than the penalty time. This parameter specifies whether the 11-bit EGPRS access is supported. None This parameter is set to avoid the ping-pong cell reselection by the fast-moving MS. after the NC NC-measurement report is sent. . the negative offset of C2 is calculated before timer T expires. range 0-20 dB is recommended. 2 For the cell with medium traffic. When the BCCH frequency of a cell is listed in the neighbor cells for the MS. This occupies many bandwidth resources. A higher value Huawei recommends that MSs work in the cell. None If this parameter is set to an excessive value. The principles of cell reselection offset are as follows: 1. This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. If you do not want a fast-moving MS to access a micro cell. If this parameter is set to a modest value. The network can require the MS to send measurement reports. and type 3. This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report in packet If this parameter is set to a modest value. the reselection transfer mode. This parameter specifies the type of the extension measurement report Three types of the extension measurement report are type 1. Yes: supported No: not supported None None None When this parameter is set to Yes. measurement report is sent frequently. The MS should stay in non-DRX mode for a period of time This parameter specifies the minimum duration when the MS stays in non-DRX mode after the measurement report is sent.This parameter specifies the number of PBCCH blocks. type 2. the extension measurement report is sent frequently. Therefore. The MS reports only the NCC bitmap of the BSIC and the carrier measurement report that matches the bitmap. some information may be missing. This parameter specifies the NCC bitmap of the measurement report sent by the MS. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. it sends the extension measurement reports. This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report in packet If this parameter is set to a modest value. No: The MS cannot receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the GPRS service. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. None Type 1: The MS sends the measurement report of the six strongest carriers to the network regardless of whether the BSIC was decoded. This parameter can be set to em0 or em1. value 0 is recommended. measurement information is not obtained timely. the MS may The MS should stay in non-DRX mode for a period of time after the measurement report stay in non-DRX mode for a long time and services may be is sent. The measurement report should contain the received signal level and BSIC. Value 3 indicates three PBCCHs. measurement report is sent frequently. This occupies many bandwidth resources. The timer is sent this parameter should be set to a high value when the through the system message broadcast in each cell. Value 2 indicates two PBCCHs. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 4. For the cell with low traffic and low equipment usage. This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32.

The MS performs automatic cell reselection. TBF establishment failure within a shorter period. PAN_INC = 2 x PAN_DEC. When T3182 expires. and Network interface or the PCCCH. If the RLC/MAC control block is used. value 7 indicates that PAN_DEC is 7. the MS increases N3102 by PAN_INC. This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. message. value 7 indicates that PAN_INC is 7. None Value 0 indicates that PAN_DEC is 0. but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying Channel Request Description. The access burst type is carried in the packet control acknowledgment Some MSs do not support the 11-bit access burst. message on all PCHs and AGCHs in non-DRX mode than in The MS stays in the DRX mode for a certain period when changing from the packet DRX mode. the GPRS network is not configured with the Gs classified into Network Operation Mode I. In addition. Therefore. the parameter value improves the transmission rate. the network requests the MS to send measurement reports to control its cell reselection. For the BTS and MS supporting the SPLIT_PG_CYCLE-based paging groups on the CCCH. When None an MS accesses the network. This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the TBF release after If this parameter is set to a higher value. nc1: MS control with measurement reports. Network Operation Mode II. There are three network control None modes. nc0: Normal MS control. Network Operation Operation Mode III. This parameter specifies the access burst type used by the MS on the PRACH and PTCCH/U. set to Pending and the T3198 is started. If the value of this parameter is set to a modest value.This parameter specifies the routing area color code of a GPRS cell. 8bit is recommended. Usually. When the GS interface is configured. the MS sends the Packet used but occupied for a long time. the timing advance can be obtained without a polling None message. Value 0 indicates that PAN_INC is 0. After the MS sends the Packet Resource Request or Packet short. the network operation modes are Currently. the This parameter determines BS_CV_MAX and is used for the MS to calculate the CV. increasing use indicates that this parameter is not used. Value 4 indicates that PAN_MAX is 4. this parameter is optional. It is also the maximum value of N3102. the small timer Based on the paging channel used by the system. 8bit: access using the 8-bit burst 11bit: access using the 11-bit burst This parameter specifies the maximum duration of the non-DRX mode. After the TBF is released. N3102 cannot exceed PAN_MAX. This parameter specifies the maximum countdown value of the MS. If When the MS receives the last RLC data block carrying the last block flag (FBI=1) and no downlink data needs to be sent. the MS releases the This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink If the timer is set to a lower value. Level 1 is the highest priority. The BSC requests for This parameter specifies whether the SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is transmitted on the CCCH of the cell. DRX It takes a shorter time to send the Immediate Assignment (discontinuous reception) is a parameter carried by the cell broadcast message. the MS decreases N3102 by PAN_DEC. Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying the final acknowledgement flag (FAI=1) and starts If the timer is set to a smaller value. In the cell reselection required by the network. the timing advance can be obtained only by sending a polling message. the TBF transfer mode to the packet idle mode. If the MS receives a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack If this parameter is set to an excessive value. None SPLIT_PG_CYCLE is used to set the DRX period. Mode II is selected by default. many resources are not confirms that all the RLC data blocks on the TBF are received. T3168 is started to radio environment decreases. If four access pulses are used. and level 4 is the lowest priority. value 32 indicates that PAN_MAX is 32. The MS may retransmits the RLC data block before the BSC parameter also determines the duration of the T3198 timer. the speed of This parameter specifies the acknowledgment message type used by the MS. the BSC compares the Radio Priority in the Channel Request message with the parameter setting in the cell. value No use indicates that this parameter is not used. When the MS receives a Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message from the network for increasing the value of V(S) or V(A). If the TBF This parameter specifies the maximum interval set for the MS to wait for the Packet establishment fails. This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. decreasing This parameter specifies the value of PAN_MAX. None This parameter specifies the priority of packet access of MSs to a cell. the TBF resources receiving the last data block. The MS sends measurement reports to the When the radio operating environment is good. PAN_INC should be greater than PAN_DEC. the MS monitors all establishment time decreases. the receive state of the data block is radio resources are not used but occupied. Network Operation Mode II is . During the period of non-DRX mode. Therefore. the MS can detect the Assignment message. Network Operation Mode I is used. but the power consumption the CCCH blocks during the non-DRX mode period and the BSC6000 reserves the MS of the MS increases. However. the average delay of packet access is Uplink Assignment message. the parameter value reduces the times of abnormally releasing TBFs. Thus. Yes: The SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is transmitted on the CCCH of the cell. The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. When the Gs interface or the PCCCH is not configured. value No use indicates that this parameter is not used. Four access pulses are recommended. sends an Uplink Acknowledgment message. many Every time the MS sends an uplink RLC data block. value No When the radio operating environment is poor. (including TFI and timeslots) are reserved for a long time.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful